Air-Cooled Scroll

Compressor Condensing Units

Installation, Operation, and
Supersedes: 150.63-NM9 (521) Form 150.63-NM9 (422)
Maintenance
035-22896-000

YCUL0020–YCUL0072
Air-Cooled Scroll Compressor Condensing Units
Style E (50 Hz and 60 Hz)
15 ton to 80 ton
50 kW to 280 kW

R-410A

Issue Date:
Products are produced at a April 30, 2022
facility whose quality-
management systems are
ISO9001 certified.
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Important!
Read before proceeding!
General safety guidelines
This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
During rigging, installation, operation, maintenance, death to themselves and people at the site.
or service, individuals may be exposed to certain com-
ponents or conditions including, but not limited to: This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
heavy objects, refrigerants, materials under pressure, rigging, installation, and operating/service personnel. It
rotating components, and both high and low voltage. is expected that these individuals possess independent
Each of these items has the potential, if misused or training that will enable them to perform their assigned
handled improperly, to cause bodily injury or death. It tasks properly and safely. It is essential that, before
is the obligation and responsibility of rigging, instal- performing any task on this equipment, this individual
lation, and operating/service personnel to identify and shall have read and understood the on-product labels,
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, this document and any referenced materials. This in-
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure dividual shall also be familiar with and comply with
to comply with any of these requirements could result all applicable industry and governmental standards and
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in regulations pertaining to the task in question.

Safety symbols
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to specific situations:

Indicates a possible hazardous situation Identifies a hazard which could lead to

which will result in death or serious injury damage to the machine, damage to other
if probeforecare is not taken. equipment and/or environmental pol-
lution if probeforecare is not taken or
instructions and are not followed.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situa- Highlights additional information useful

tion which will result in possible injuries to the technician in completing the work
or damage to equipment if probeforecare being performed properly.
is not taken.

External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product line, is
not to be connected inside the control cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers and
controls and any external wiring must not be installed inside the micro panel. All wiring must be
in accordance with Johnson Controls’ published specifications and must be performed only by a
qualified electrician. Johnson Controls will NOT be responsible for damage/problems resulting
from improbeforeconnections to the controls or application of improbeforecontrol signals. Failure
to follow this warning will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property
or personal injury.

2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Changeability of this document

In complying with Johnson Controls’ policy for con- It is the responsibility of rigging, lifting, and operating/
tinuous product improvement, the information con- service personnel to verify the applicability of these
tained in this document is subject to change without documents to the equipment. If there is any question
notice. Johnson Controls makes no commitment to regarding the applicability of these documents, rig-
update or provide current information automatically ging, lifting, and operating/service personnel should
to the manual or product owner. Updated manuals, if verify whether the equipment has been modified and
applicable, can be obtained by contacting the nearest if current literature is available from the owner of the
Johnson Controls Service office or accessing the John- equipment before performing any work on the chiller.
son Controls Knowledge Exchange website at https://
docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/.

Revision notes
Revisions made to this document are indicated in the following table. These revisions are to technical information,
and any other changes in spelling, grammar, or formatting are not included.

AFFECTED PAGES DESCRIPTION

11 Refrigerant Circuit section updated
34 Refrigerant Piping section updated
42, 43 Physical Data tables updated
89, 91 Unit Dimension tables updated

Associated literature
MANUAL DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER
Unit Replacement Parts Guide 150.63-RP7
Air Cooled Liquid Chillers Condenser Corrosion Protection 150.12-ES1
Shipping Damage Claims 50.15-NM
YORK DX Piping Guide 50.40-ES2

Conditioned based maintenance

Traditional chiller maintenance is based upon assumed Planned Service Agreement that leverages real time
and generalized conditions. In lieu of the traditional and historical data, delivering performance reporting,
maintenance program, a Johnson Controls YORK corrective actions required and data enabled guidance
Conditioned Based Maintenance (CBM) program can for optimal operation and lifecycle assurance. The pro-
be substituted. This CBM service plan is built around gram will include fault detection diagnostics, operation
the specific needs for the chiller, operating conditions, code statistics, performance based algorithms and ad-
and annualized impact realized by the chiller. Your lo- vance rules based rationale delivered by the Johnson
cal Johnson Controls Branch can propose a customized Controls Connected Equipment Portal.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table of contents

SECTION 1 – GENERAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION AND SAFETY........................................................... 11

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 11
Compressors................................................................................................................................................... 11
Condenser....................................................................................................................................................... 11
Refrigerant Circuit........................................................................................................................................... 11
Warranty.......................................................................................................................................................... 11
Safety and Quality........................................................................................................................................... 12
About this Manual............................................................................................................................................ 12
Misuse of Equipment....................................................................................................................................... 12

SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................15

Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 15
General System Description............................................................................................................................ 15
Microcomputer Control Center........................................................................................................................ 16
Building Automation System Interface............................................................................................................. 17
Communications.............................................................................................................................................. 17
Power Panel.................................................................................................................................................... 17
Discharge Pressure Transducers and Readout Capability.............................................................................. 18
Basic Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 23

SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE.........................................................................................................29

Delivery and Storage....................................................................................................................................... 29
Inspection........................................................................................................................................................ 29
Unit Rigging..................................................................................................................................................... 29

SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION..............................................................................................................................31
Installation Checklist........................................................................................................................................ 31
Handling.......................................................................................................................................................... 31
Location and Clearances................................................................................................................................. 31
Spring Isolators (Optional)............................................................................................................................... 32
Compressor Mounting..................................................................................................................................... 32
Pipework Arrangement.................................................................................................................................... 32
Duct Work Connection.................................................................................................................................... 32
Recommendations of the Building Services Research Association................................................................ 32
Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Relief Valves.................................................................................................................................................... 34
High Pressure Cutout...................................................................................................................................... 34
Compressor Heaters....................................................................................................................................... 34
Refrigerant Piping............................................................................................................................................ 34
Oil Traps.......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Refrigerant Charge.......................................................................................................................................... 37
Refrigerant Piping Reference.......................................................................................................................... 37
Filter Driers / Sight Glasses / TXVs................................................................................................................. 37

JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table of contents (cont’d)

SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA.........................................................................................................................41
Operational Limitations (English).................................................................................................................... 41
Physical Data (English)................................................................................................................................... 42
Physical Data (SI)............................................................................................................................................ 43
Electrical Data................................................................................................................................................. 44
Electrical Notes and Legend........................................................................................................................... 49
Wiring Diagrams.............................................................................................................................................. 52
Dimensions (English)...................................................................................................................................... 88
Clearances...................................................................................................................................................... 92
Weight Distribution and Isolator Mounting Positions....................................................................................... 93
Isolator Locations (English)............................................................................................................................. 94
Isolator Locations (SI)..................................................................................................................................... 95
Isolation Information........................................................................................................................................ 96
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions......................................................................... 97
Two Inch Deflection Seismic Isolator Cross-Reference.................................................................................. 98
Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment................................................................................................... 99
Durulene Isolator Cross-Reference............................................................................................................... 100
Installation of Durulene Vibration Isolators.................................................................................................... 101

SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING........................................................................................................................103
Preparation – Power Off................................................................................................................................ 103
Preparation – Power On................................................................................................................................ 104
Equipment Pre-Startup and Startup Checklist............................................................................................... 105

SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS.........................................................................................................................109

Introduction.................................................................................................................................................... 109
Microprocessor Board................................................................................................................................... 109
Unit Switch.................................................................................................................................................... 110
Display........................................................................................................................................................... 110
Keypad.......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Battery Back-Up............................................................................................................................................ 110
Transformer .................................................................................................................................................. 110
Single System Select And Programming # of Compressors......................................................................... 110

SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION.......................................................................................................................139

Capacity Control............................................................................................................................................ 139
Suction Pressure Limit Controls.................................................................................................................... 139
Discharge Pressure Limit Controls................................................................................................................ 139
Discharge Air Temperature Control............................................................................................................... 139
Suction Pressure Control.............................................................................................................................. 141
System Lead/Lag.......................................................................................................................................... 142
Compressor Lead/Lag................................................................................................................................... 142
Anti-Recycle Timer........................................................................................................................................ 142
Anti-Coincidence Timer................................................................................................................................. 142
Evaporator Blower Control............................................................................................................................ 142
Evaporator Heater Control............................................................................................................................ 142
Pumpdown Control........................................................................................................................................ 142
Load Limiting................................................................................................................................................. 145

6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table of contents (cont’d)

Compressor Run Status................................................................................................................................ 145
Alarm Status.................................................................................................................................................. 145
BAS/EMS Discharge Air Temperature Reset Using a Voltage or Current Signal.......................................... 146

SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................147

Clearing History Buffers................................................................................................................................ 147
Service Mode................................................................................................................................................ 147
Service Mode – Outputs................................................................................................................................ 147
Service Mode – Condensing Unit Configuration...........................................................................................148
Service Mode – Analog and Digital Inputs..................................................................................................... 148
Control Inputs/Outputs.................................................................................................................................. 149
Checking Inputs and Outputs........................................................................................................................ 151

SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE..........................................................................................................................159
Important....................................................................................................................................................... 159
Compressors................................................................................................................................................. 159
Condenser Fan Motors.................................................................................................................................. 159
Condenser Coils............................................................................................................................................ 159
Operating Parameters................................................................................................................................... 159
On-Board Battery Back-Up............................................................................................................................ 159
Overall Unit Inspection.................................................................................................................................. 159
BACnet, Modbus, and YorkTalk 2 Communications...................................................................................... 160

JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

List of figures

FIGURE 1 - YCUL Air-Cooled Scroll Compressor Condensing Unit�����������������������������������������������������������������������15

FIGURE 2 - Unit Components Front�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
FIGURE 3 - Control/Power Panel Components Single System Units�������������������������������������������������������������������� 21
FIGURE 4 - Control/Power Panel Components Dual System Units�����������������������������������������������������������������������22
FIGURE 5 - Refrigerant Flow Diagram�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������27
FIGURE 6 - Process and Instrumentation Diagram������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������28
FIGURE 7 - Unit Rigging����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������29
FIGURE 8 - Wiring Options for Remotely Start or Stop the Dual System Unit������������������������������������������������������ 33
FIGURE 9 - Single-Point Supply Connection – Terminal Block, Non-Fused Disconnect Switch,
or Circuit Breaker��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������38
FIGURE 10 - Discharge Air Sensor Field Wiring����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������38
FIGURE 11 - Control Wiring�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������39
FIGURE 12 - Control Wiring Diagram, Single Circuit, IPU II����������������������������������������������������������������������������������52
FIGURE 13 - Control Wiring Diagram, Single Circuit, IPU II����������������������������������������������������������������������������������55
FIGURE 14 - Control Wiring Diagram, Dual Circuit, IPU II�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������56
FIGURE 15 - Control Wiring Diagram, Dual Circuit, IPU II�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������58
FIGURE 16 - Control Wiring Diagram, Details, Single Circuit��������������������������������������������������������������������������������60
FIGURE 17 - Control Wiring Diagram, Details, Dual Circuit�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������62
FIGURE 18 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������64
FIGURE 19 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������66
FIGURE 20 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������68
FIGURE 21 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������70
FIGURE 22 - Power Wiring, Dual Circuit����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������73
FIGURE 23 - Power Wiring, Dual Circuit����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������74
FIGURE 24 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������76
FIGURE 25 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������78
FIGURE 26 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������80
FIGURE 27 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������82
FIGURE 28 - Connection Wiring, Dual Circuit��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������85
FIGURE 29 - Connection Wiring, Dual Circuit��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������86
FIGURE 30 - Unit Clearances – All Models������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������92
FIGURE 31 - Sample Isolator Location Drawing����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������93
FIGURE 32 - Isolator Locations, 60 Hz������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������94
FIGURE 33 - Isolator Locations, 50 Hz������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������95
FIGURE 34 - One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross-Reference����������������������������������������������������������������������96
FIGURE 35 - One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions����������������������������������������������������������� 97
FIGURE 36 - Two Inch Deflection Seismic Isolator Cross-Reference�������������������������������������������������������������������� 98
FIGURE 37 - Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������99
FIGURE 38 - Durulene Isolator Cross-Reference������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������100
FIGURE 39 - Installation of Durulene Vibration Isolators�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������101
FIGURE 40 - Discharge Air Temperature Control�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������140
FIGURE 41 - Suction Pressure Control����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������141
FIGURE 42 - YCUL0045 – YCUL0072 Fan Location (Typical)����������������������������������������������������������������������������143
FIGURE 43 - Microboard Layout��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������150
FIGURE 44 - I/O Board Relay Contact Architecture���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������154
FIGURE 45 - Printer to Microboard Electrical Connections����������������������������������������������������������������������������������155
FIGURE 46 - Micro Panel Connections����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������161

8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

List of tables

TABLE 1 - Fitting Equivalent Lengths���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������35

TABLE 2 - Refrigerant Piping Charges�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������35
TABLE 3 - Miscellaneous Liquid Line Pressure Drops�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������36
TABLE 4 - Refrigerant Line Connections���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������36
TABLE 5 - Voltage Limitations��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������41
TABLE 6 - Physical Data (English)�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������42
TABLE 7 - Physical Data (SI)���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������43
TABLE 8 - Micro Panel Power Supply��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������44
TABLE 9 - Voltage Range��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������44
TABLE 10 - Lug Ranges�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������48
TABLE 11 - Status Key Messages Quick Reference List������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 116
TABLE 12 - Operation Data����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������120
TABLE 13 - Cooling Setpoints Programmable Limits and Defaults����������������������������������������������������������������������131
TABLE 14 - Program Key Limits and Defaults�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������131
TABLE 15 - Setpoints Quick Reference List���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������132
TABLE 16 - Options Key Programming Quick Reference List�����������������������������������������������������������������������������138
TABLE 17 - Discharge Air Temperature Control for 5 and 6 Compressors (7 and 8 Steps)��������������������������������� 140
TABLE 18 - Discharge Air Temperature Control for 4 Compressors (6 Steps)����������������������������������������������������� 140
TABLE 19 - YCUL0020 – YCUL0072 Condenser Fan Control Using Outdoor Ambient Temperature
and Discharge Pressure ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������143
TABLE 20 - YCUL0045 – YCUL0072 Condenser Fan Control Using Discharge Pressure Only������������������������� 143
TABLE 21 - YCUL0020 – YCUL0072 Low Ambient Condenser Fan Control – Discharge Pressure Control������� 144
TABLE 22 - YCUL0020 – YCUL0035 Low Ambient Condenser Fan Control – Discharge Pressure Control������� 144
TABLE 23 - Compressor Operation – Load Limiting��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������145
TABLE 24 - I/O Digital Inputs�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������149
TABLE 25 - I/O Digital Outputs�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������149
TABLE 26 - I/O Analog Inputs������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������149
TABLE 27 - I/O Analog Outputs����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������149
TABLE 28 - Outdoor Air Sensor Temperature/Voltage/Correlation�����������������������������������������������������������������������151
TABLE 29 - Discharge Air Temp. Sensor Temperature/Voltage/Resistance Correlation�������������������������������������� 152
TABLE 30 - Pressure Transducers�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������153
TABLE 31 - Troubleshooting��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������156
TABLE 32 - Minimum, Maximum, and Default Values������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������161
TABLE 33 - Values Required for Bas Communication�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������162
TABLE 34 - Real Time Error Numbers�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������162
TABLE 35 - BACnet and Modbus Communications Data Map����������������������������������������������������������������������������164
TABLE 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������169

JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 1 – General equipment information and safety 1

Introduction Motors
The 15 ton through 80 ton (50 kW through 280 kW) The fan motors are totally enclosed air-over (TEAO),
YCUL models are shipped complete from the factory squirrel-cage type, current protected. They feature ball
ready for field installation. bearings that are double-sealed and permanently lubri­
cated.
The unit is pressure-tested, evacuated and given a ni-
trogen holding charge and includes an initial oil charge Refrigerant Circuit
(R-410A refrigerant supplied by others). After assem-
All unit piping will be copbeforewith brazed joints.
bly, an operational test is performed to ensure that each
The liquid line will include a field connection shut-off
control device operates correctly.
valve with charg­ing port located on each condenser
The unit structure is heavy-gauge, galvanized steel. circuit. Suction line connections are provided on each
This galvanized steel is coated with baked-on powder refrigeration circuit.
paint which, when subjected to ASTM B117 1000 hour
All expansion valves, liquid line solenoid valves, filter
salt spray testing, yields a minimum ASTM 1654 rat-
driers, sight glasses, refriger­ant, and refrigerant field
ing of 6. Units are designed in accordance with NFPA
piping are supplied by others.
70 (National Elec­tric Code), ASHRAE/ANSI 15 Safe-
ty code for mechanical refrigeration, and are cETL Warranty
listed. All units are produced at an ISO 9000-registered
facility. Johnson Controls warrants all equipment and materials
against defects in workmanship and materials for a pe-
Compressors riod of eighteen months from date of shipment, unless
labor or extended warranty has been purchased as part
The condensing unit has suction-gas cooled, hermet- of the contract.
ic, scroll com­pressors. The compressors incorporate
a compliant scroll design in both the axial and radial The warranty is limited to parts only replacement and
direction. All rotating parts of the compressors are shipping of any faulty part, or sub-assembly, which has
statically and dynamically balanced. A large internal failed due to poor quality or manufacturing errors. All
volume and oil reservoir pro­vides greater liquid toler- claims must be supported by evidence that the failure
ance. Compressor crankcase heaters are also included has occurred within the warranty period, and that the
for extra protection against liquid migration. unit has been operated within the designed parameters
specified.
Condenser All warranty claims must specify the unit model, serial
Coils number, order number and run hours/starts. Model and
serial number information is printed on the unit identi-
Fin and tube condenser coils of seamless, inter­nally- fication plate.
enhanced, high-condensing-coefficient, corrosion re-
sistant copbeforetubes are arranged in staggered rows, The unit warranty will be void if any modification to
mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Integral the unit is carried out without written approval from
subcooling is included. The design working pressure Johnson Controls.
of the coil is 650 psig (45 barg). For warranty purposes, the following conditions must
be satisfied:
Low Sound Fans
The condenser fans are composed of corrosion resis- • The initial start of the unit must be carried out by
tant aluminum hub and composite blades molded into trained personnel from an Authorized Johnson
a low noise airfoil section. They are designed for maxi- Controls Service Center (see SECTION 6 – COM-
mum efficiency and are statically and dynamically bal- MISSIONING).
anced for vibration-free operation. They are directly • Only genuine YORK approved spare parts, oils,
driven, and positioned for vertical air discharge. The coolants, and refrigerants must be used.
fan guards are constructed of heavy-gauge, rust-resis-
tant, PVC (polyvinyl chloride)-coated steel wire.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 1 – General equipment information and safety
Issue date: 4/30/2022

• All the scheduled maintenance operations detailed About this Manual

in this manual must be performed at the specified
The following terms are used in this document to alert
times by suitably trained and qualified personnel
the reader to areas of potential hazard.
(see SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE).
A warning is given in this document to
• Failure to satisfy any of these conditions will au- identify a hazard, which could lead to
tomatically void the warranty (refer to Warranty personal injury. Usually an instruction
Policy). will be given, together with a brief expla-
nation and the possible result of ignoring
Safety and Quality the instruction.
Standards for Safety and Quality A caution identifies a hazard which could
YCUL units are designed and built within an ISO 9002 lead to damage to the machine, damage
accredited design and manufacturing organization. The to other equipment and/or environmental
condensing units comply with the applicable sections pollution. Usually an instruction will be
of the following Standards and Codes: given, together with a brief explanation
and the possible result of ignoring the
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15- Safety Code for instruction.
Mechanical Refrigeration.
A note is used to highlight additional
• ANSI/NFPA Standard 70- National Electrical information, which may be helpful to
Code (N.E.C.). you but where there are no special safety
• ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code- Section implications.
VIII Division 1.
• ASHRAE 90.1- Energy Efficiency compliance.
The contents of this manual include suggested best
• ARI 370- Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrig- working practices and procedures. These are issued for
eration and Air Conditioning Equipment. guidance only, and they do not take precedence over
the above stated individual responsibility and/or local
• Conform to Intertek Testing Services, formerly
safety regulations.
ETL, for construction of condensing units and
provide E.T.L./c E.T.L. Listing label. This manual and any other document supplied with
the unit are the property of Johnson Controls which re-
In addition, the condensing units conform to Under-
serves all rights. They may not be reproduced, in whole
writers Laboratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers
or in part, without written authorization from an autho-
and provide U.L./cU.L. Listing Label.
rized Johnson Controls representative.
Responsibility for Safety
Misuse of Equipment
Every care has been taken in the design and manufac-
ture of the unit to ensure compliance with the safety Suitability for Application
requirements listed above. However, the individual The unit is intended for DX cooling applications and is
operating or working on any machinery is primarily not suitable for purposes other than those specified in
responsible for: these instructions. Any use of the equipment other than
• Personal safety, safety of other personnel, and the its intended use, or operation of the equipment contrary
machinery. to the relevant procedures may result in injury to the
operator, or damage to the equipment.
• Correct utilization of the machinery in accordance
with the procedures detailed in the manuals. The unit must not be operated outside the design pa-
rameters specified in this manual.

12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 1 – General equipment information and safety
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Structural Support Rotating Parts

1
Structural support of the unit must be provided as in- Fan guards must be fitted at all times and not removed
dicated in these instructions. Failure to provide probe- unless the power supply has been isolated. If ductwork
foresupport may result in injury to the operator, or is to be fitted, requiring the wire fan guards to be re-
damage to the equipment and/or building. moved, alternative safety measures must be taken to
protect against the risk of injury from rotating fans.
Mechanical Strength
The unit is not designed to withstand loads or stresses Sharp Edges
from adjacent equipment, pipework or structures. Ad- The fins on the air-cooled condenser coils have sharp
ditional components must not be mounted on the unit. metal edges. Reasonable care should be taken when
Any such extraneous loads may cause structural failure working in contact with the coils to avoid the risk of
and may result in injury to the operator, or damage to minor abrasions and lacerations. The use of gloves is
the equipment. recommended.

General Access Frame rails, brakes, and other components may also
have sharp edges. Reasonable care should be taken
There are a number of areas and features, which may
when working in contact with any components to avoid
be a hazard and potentially cause injury when working
risk of minor abrasions and lacerations.
on the unit unless suitable safety precautions are taken.
It is important to ensure access to the unit is restricted Refrigerants and Oils
to suitably qualified persons who are familiar with the
potential hazards and precautions necessary for safe Refrigerants and oils used in the unit are generally non-
operation and maintenance of equipment containing toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive, and pose no
high temperatures, pressures and voltages. special safety hazards. Use of gloves and safety glasses
is, however, recommended when working on the unit.
Pressure Systems The buildup of refrigerant vapor, from a leak for ex-
ample, does pose a risk of asphyxiation in confined or
The unit contains refrigerant vapor and liquid under
enclosed spaces and attention should be given to good
pressure, release of which can be a danger and cause
ventilation.
injury. The user should ensure that care is taken during
installation, operation and maintenance to avoid dam- High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning
age to the pressure system. No attempt should be made
to gain access to the component parts of the pressure High temperature and pressure cleaning methods (for
system other than by suitably trained and qualified per- example, steam cleaning) should not be used on any
sonnel. part of the pressure system as this may cause opera-
tion of the pressure relief device(s). Detergents and
Electrical solvents, which may cause corrosion, should also be
avoided.
The unit must be grounded. No installation or main-
tenance work should be attempted on the electrical Emergency Shutdown
equipment without first switching power OFF, isolat-
ing and locking-off the power supply. Servicing and In case of emergency, the control panel is fitted with a
maintenance on live equipment must only be per- Unit Switch to stop the unit in an emergency. When op-
formed by suitably trained and qualified personnel. No erated, it removes the low voltage 120 VAC electrical
attempt should be made to gain access to the control supply from the inverter system, thus shutting down
panel or electrical enclosures during normal operation the unit.
of the unit.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

14 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 2 – Product description

Introduction General System Description
YORK Air-Cooled Scroll Condensing Units are the 2
Compressors
perfect refrigeration components for all air condition-
ing applications that use DX central station air han- The condensing unit has suction-gas cooled, hermetic,
dling. They are designed for outside (roof or ground scroll compressors. The YCUL compressors incorpo-
level) installation. Each unit includes hermetic scroll rate a compliant scroll design in both the axial and
compressors, an air-cooled condenser, and a weather radial direction. All rotating parts are statically and
resistant microprocessor control center, all mounted on dynamically balanced. A large internal volume and oil
a formed steel base. reservoir provides greater liquid tolerance. Compres-
sor crankcase heaters are also included for extra pro-
The unit is pressure-tested, evacuated and given a nitro- tection against liquid migration.
gen holding charge, and includes an initial oil charge.
The R-410A refrigerant is provided by other suppliers. An annular discharge check valve and reverse vent as-
After assembly, a operational test is performed to en- sembly provides low pressure drop, silent shutdown,
sure that each control device operates correctly. and reverse rotation protection.

The unit structure is heavy-gauge, galvanized steel. Condenser

This galvanized steel is coated with baked-on pow- Coils – Fin and tube condenser coils of seamless, in-
der paint which, when subjected to ASTM B117 1000 ternally-enhanced, high-condensing-coefficient, corro-
hour, salt spray testing, yields a minimum ASTM 1654 sion resistant copbeforetubes are arranged in staggered
rating of 6. Units are designed in accordance with rows, mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Inte-
NFPA 70 (National Elec­tric Code), ASHRAE/ANSI 15 gral subcooling is included. The design working pres-
Safety code for mechanical refrigeration, and are cETL sure of the coil is 650 psig (45 barg).
listed. All units are produced at an ISO 9000-registered
facility. Low Sound Fans
All exposed power wiring is routed through liquid- The condenser fans are composed of corrosion resis-
tight, non-metallic conduit. tant aluminum hub and composite blades molded into
a low noise airfoil section. They are designed for maxi-
mum efficiency and are statically and dynamically bal-
anced for vibration-free operation. They are directly

Figure 1 - YCUL Air-Cooled Scroll Compressor Condensing Unit

JOHNSON CONTROLS 15
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

driven, and positioned for vertical air discharge. The • Remote reset temperature range
fan guards are constructed of heavy-gauge, rust-resis-
• Set daily schedule/holiday for start/stop
tant, PVC (polyvinyl chloride)-coated steel wire.
• Manual override for servicing
Motors
• Low and high ambient cutouts
The fan motors are totally enclosed air-over (TEAO),
squirrel-cage type, current protected. They feature ball • Number of compressors
bearings that are double-sealed and permanently lubri- • Low suction pressure cutout
cated.
• High discharge pressure cutout
Microcomputer Control Center
• Anti-recycle timer (compressor start cycle time)
All controls are contained in a NEMA 3R/12 cabinet
and include Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with Light • Anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts)
Emitting Diode (LED) backlighting for outdoor view- Unit
ing. The display includes the following features:
This section is used to:
• Two display lines
• Set clock
• Twenty characters beforeline
• Set options
Display/Print
• Set unit option
Color coded 12-button non-tactile keypad with sec-
tions for display and print of typical information: Set unit control for Discharge Air Temperature Control
or for Suction Pressure Control (requires Suction Pres­
• Suction temperatures (optional) sure Transducers) is standard.
• Ambient temperature Unit On/Off Switch
• System pressures (each circuit) The microprocessor control center is capable of
• Operating hours and starts (each compressor) display­ing the following:

• Print calls up to the liquid crystal display • Suction temperatures (optional)

• Operating data for the systems • Low ambient temperature cutout setting

• History of fault shutdown data for up to the last • English or metric data
six fault shutdown conditions. • Suction pressure cutout setting
• An RS-232 port, in conjunction with the press-to- • Each system suction pressure
print button, is provided to allow hard copy print-
outs through a separate printer (by others). • System discharge pressure

Entry • Discharge air temperature reset through a YORK

ISN DDC or Building Automation System (by
This section is used to enter setpoints or modify system others) using the following:
values.
• A pulse-width modulated (PWM) input as
Setpoints standard
Updating can be performed to: • A 4 mA to 20 mA or 0 VDC to 10 VDC input,
or contact closure with the optional B.A.S.
• Suction pressure setting
interface option
• Suction pressure control zone

16 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

• Anti-recycle timer status for each system • The standard unit capabilities include remote
start-stop, remote discharge air temperature re-
• Anti-coincident system start timer condition
set through a PWM 4 mA to 20 mA or 0 VDC
• Compressor run status to 10 VDC input signal, or up to two stages of 2
demand (load) limiting depending on model.
• No cooling load condition
• The standard control panel can be directly con-
• Day, date and time
nected to a Johnson Controls Building Automated
• Daily start/stop times System.
• Holiday status Communications
• Automatic or manual system lead/lag control • Native communication capability for BACnet
(Discharge Air Temperature control only) (MS/TP) and Modbus
• Automatic lead/lag of compressors within a sys- • Optional communication available for N2 and
tem LON through eLink option
• Compressor starts and operating hours (each com- Power Panel
pressor)
Each panel contains:
• Status of hot gas valves, and fan operation
• Compressor power terminals
• Run permissive status
• Compressor motor starting contactors in accor-
• Number of compressors running dance with International Electrotechnical Com-
• Liquid solenoid valve status mission (I.E.C.).

• Load and unload timer status • Control power terminals to accept incoming for
115-1-60 control power
Provisions are included for pumpdown at shutdown,
optional remote discharge air temperature reset, and • Fan contactors and overload current protection
two steps of demand load limiting from an external The power wiring is routed through liquid-tight con-
building automation system. Unit alarm contacts are duit to the compressors and fans.
standard.
The operating program is stored in non-volatile mem-
ory (EPROM) to eliminate condensing unit failure due
to AC powered failure/battery discharge. Programmed
setpoints are retained in lithium battery-backed RTC
memory for 5 years minimum.

Building Automation System Interface

The Microprocessor Board can accept a 4 mA to
20 mA, 0 VDC to 10 VDC or contact closure input
to reset the discharge air temperature from a Building
Automation System. Only one of the following remote
communications options can be offered on a unit at a
time: BAS Interface, Remote Control Panel or Multi-
unit Sequence Control (Factory Mounted).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Accessories and options

Electrical Options Control Options
Compressor Power Connections Ambient Kit (Low)
Single-point terminal block connection(s) are provid- Units will operate to 25°F (-4°C). This factory mount-
ed as standard. The following power connections are ed accessory includes all necessary components to
available as factory mounted options. See Electrical permit chiller operation to 0°F (-18°C). This option
Data on page 47 for specific voltage and options includes the Discharge Pressure Transducer / Readout
availability. Capability option. For probeforehead pressure control
in applications below 25°F (-4°C), where wind gusts
Single-Point Supply Terminal Block may exceed five mph, it is recommended that factory
(standard on YCUL models). mounted optional Condenser Louvered Enclosure Pan-
Includes enclosure, terminal-block and interconnecting els also be included.
wiring to the compressors. Separate external protection
must be supplied, by others, in the incoming compres- Ambient Kit (High)
sor-power wiring. This option cannot be included if This factory mounted kit is required if units are to op-
either the Single Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch erate when the ambient temperature is above 110°F
or Single-Point Circuit Breaker options have been in- (43°C) and includes discharge pressure transducers.
cluded. This option includes the factory mounted Discharge
Pressure Transducer / Readout Capability option.
Single-Point Non-Fused Disconnect Switch
Unit-mounted disconnect switch with external, lock- Building Automation System Interface
able handle in compliance with Article 440-14 of The factory addition of a Printed Circuit Board to ac-
N.E.C., can be supplied to isolate the unit power volt- cept a 4 mA to 20 mA, 0 VDC to 10 VDC or contact
age for servicing. Separate external fusing must be closure input to reset the leaving chiller liquid tempera-
supplied, by others in the power wiring, which must ture from a Building Automation System. Only one of
comply with the National Electrical Code and/or local following options can be offered on a unit at a time:
codes. BAS, Remote Control Panel or Multi-Unit Sequence
Control (Factory-Mounted). The standard unit capa-
Single-Point Circuit Breaker bilities include remote start/stop, remote discharge air
A unit mounted circuit breaker with external, lockable temperature reset through a PWM input signal, or up
handle (in compliance with N.E.C. Article 440-14), to two steps of demand (load) limiting depending on
can be supplied to isolate the power voltage for servic- model. The standard control panel can be directly con-
ing. This option includes the Single-Point Power con- nected to a Johnson Controls Building Automated Sys-
nection. tem via the standard onboard RS485 communication
port.
Control Transformer
Language LCD and Keypad Display
This transformer converts unit power voltage to
115‑1‑60 (0.5 KVA or 1.0 KVA capacity). Factory Spanish, French, and German unit LCD controls and
mounting includes primary and secondary wiring be- keypad display are available; however the standard
tween the transformer and the control panel. language is English.

Power Factor Correction Capacitors Discharge Pressure Transducers and

Readout Capability
These factory mounted capacitors will correct unit
compressor to a power factor between 0.90 and 0.95. The addition of factory mounted pressure transducers
allows models to sense and display discharge pressure.
This is recommended for brine chilling applications.
This option is included with either the low or high am-
bient kits.

18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Suction Pressure Transducers Post-Coated Dipped Condenser Coils

This transducer permits the unit to sense and display The unit’s coils are constructed with dipped-cured con-
suction pressure. This capability is standard on YCUL denser coils. This is the choice for corrosive applica-
models. tions (with the exception of strong alkalis, oxidizers 2
and wet bromine, chlorine and fluorine in concentra-
Multi-Unit Sequencing tions greater than 100 ppm).
A separate sequencing control center is provided to
handle sequencing control of up to eight chillers in CopbeforeFin Condenser Coils
parallel based on mixed liquid temperature (intercon- The unit’s coils are constructed with copbeforefins.
necting wiring by others). The only one of following This is not recommended for units in areas where they
factory mounted options can be offered on a unit at a may be exposed to acid rain.
time: BAS, Remote Control Panel or Multi-Unit Se-
quence Control. Enclosure Panels (Unit)
Tamperproof enclosure panels prevent unauthorized
Compressor and Piping Options access to units. Enclosure panels can provide an aes-
Chicago Code Relief Valves thetically pleasing alternative to expensive fencing.
Additionally, for correct head pressure control, John-
Unit will be provided with relief valves to meet Chi- son Controls recommends the use of louvered panels.
cago code requirements (Factory-Mounted).
Louvered Panels (Full Unit)
Service Isolation Valve
Louvered panels surround the front, back, and sides of
Service isolation valves are standard to unit. This in- the unit. They prevent unauthorized access and visu-
cludes a system high pressure relief valve or inter- ally screen unit components. Unrestricted air flow is
nal compressor relief mechanism in compliance with permitted through generously sized louvered openings.
ASHRAE 15. (Factory-Mounted) This option is applicable for any outdoor design ambi-
ent temperature up to 115°F (46°C). (Factory-Mount-
Hot Gas By-Pass
ed.)
Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities be-
low the minimum step of compressor unloading to as Sound Attenuation
low as 5% capacity (depending on both the unit and One or both of the following factory mounted sound
operating conditions) by introducing an artificial load attenuation options are recommended for residential or
on the cooler. Hot gas by-pass is installed on only re- other similar sound-sensitive locations. Louvered Pan-
frigerant system #1 on two-circuited units (Factory- els can be ordered for winter applications where wind
Mounted). gusts may exceed five miles an hour. The following
types of enclosure options are available:
Condenser and Cabinet Options
Condenser coil protection against corrosive environ- Compressor Acoustic Sound Blanket
ments is available by choosing any of the following Each factory mounted compressor is individually en-
options. For additional application recommendations, closed by an acoustic sound blanket. The sound blan-
refer to Form 150.12-ES1. (Factory-Mounted) kets are made with one layer of acoustical absorbent
textile fiber of 5/8 in. (15 mm) thickness; one layer
Pre-Coated Fin Condenser Coils
of anti-vibrating heavy material thickness of 1/8 in.
The unit’s coils are constructed with epoxy coated (3 mm). Both are closed by two sheets of welded PVC,
aluminum fins. This can provide corrosion resistance reinforced for temperature and UV resistance.
comparable to copper-fin coils in typical seashore loca-
tions. Either these or the post-coated coils (below) are
recommended for units being installed at the seashore
or where salt spray may hit the unit.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Ultra Quiet Fan Vibration Isolators

Lower RPM, 8-pole fan motors are used with steeper- Level adjusting, spring type 1 in. (25.4 mm) or seismic
pitch fans on these factory mounted devices. deflection or neoprene pad isolators for mounting un-
der unit base rails. These are field mounted.

Unit components

MICROPANEL FANS

COMPRESSORS

CONDENSER
COILS

Figure 2 - Unit Components Front

20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Power panel components

CIRCUIT BREAKER KEYPAD AND DISPLAY UNIT SWITCH

2

COMPRESSOR CONTACTORS USER TERMINAL BLOCK

LD28297

Figure 3 - Control/Power Panel Components Single System Units

JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Power panel / control components

TERMINAL BLOCK FAN FUSES CR1 / CR2

COMPRESSOR CONTACTS TB1 CTB1

LD28298

Figure 4 - Control/Power Panel Components Dual System Units

22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Product identification number (PIN)

Basic Unit
2
BASIC MODEL NUMBER

YCUL0045EE46XEA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
BASE PRODUCT TYPE NOMINAL CAPACITY UNIT DESIGNATOR REFRIGERANT VOLTAGE/STARTER DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT LEVEL

L :Scroll E :High Efficiency E :R-410A X :Across the Line A :Engineering Change

Nominal Capacity
or PIN Level
U : Unit 1 7 :200 / 3 / 60
2 8 :230 / 3 / 60 E :Design Series
YC :YORK Condensing 4 0 :380 / 3 / 60
4 6 :460 / 3 / 60
5 8 :575 / 3 / 60
5 0 :380-415 / 3 / 50

FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

MODEL Model (PIN 1-4) YCUL Ycul
0020 0020
0024 0024
0031 0031
0035 0035
CAP Capacity (PIN 5-8) 0045 0045
0051 0051
0055 0055
0065 0065
0072 0072
UNIT Unit Designator (PIN 9) E High efficiency
REF Refrigerant (PIN 10) E R-410a
17 200/3/60
28 230/3/60
40 380/3/60
VOLTS Voltage (PIN 11 & 12)
46 460/3/60
50 380-415/3/50
58 575/3/60
STARTER Starter (PIN 13) X Across the line starter
DESIGN Design Series (PIN 14) E Design series e
DEV Development Level (PIN 15) A Development level a
SX Single point terminal block
SD Single point non-fused disconnect
POWER Power Field (PIN 16 & 17)
BX Single point circuit breaker
QQ Special power option required
X No control transformer required
TRANS Cntrl Transformer (PIN 18) T Control transformer required
Q Special control transformer required

JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Product identification number (PIN) (cont’d)

FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
X No power capacitor required
PFC Power Factor Capacitor (19) C Power capacitor required
Q Special power capacitor required
H High ambient (standard)
AMB
Ambient Kits (PIN 20) A Both low and high ambient (low ambient kit required)
Q Special ambient kit required
X No BAS reset/offset required
M ISN microgateway required
BAS Bas Reset/Offset (PIN 21)
T BAS reset/offset required
Q Special BAS reset/offset required
X English
S Spanish
LCD Language (PIN 22) F French
G German
Q Special language required
R Discharge pressure readout (standard)
RDOUT Readout Kits (PIN 23)
Q Special pressure readout required
SAFETY Safety Codes (PIN 24) L North American safety code (cUL/cETL)
X No option required
SENSOR PIN 25
Q Special quote
X No motor current readout required
PUMP Motor Current Module (PIN 26) C Motor current readout
Q Special quote
X No remote panel required
REMOTE Remote Panel (PIN 27) O OptiView remote panel required
Q Special remote panel required
X No sequence kit required
SEQ Sequence Kit (PIN 28) S Sequence kit required = {SEQ/S}
Q Special sequence kit required
NUM Suction temp = {TEMP/NUM} degrees
TEMP Suction Temp (PIN 29,30)
QQ Special LWT requirements
X Service isolation valves
CHICAGO Chicago Code Kit (PIN 31) B Both Chicago code and Serv isolation
Q Special Chicago code kit required
X Standard valves required
VALVES Valves (PIN 32)
Q Special optional valves requiredd
X No hot gas bypass required
1 Hot gas bypass required - 1 circuit
HGBP Hot Gas Bypass (PIN 33)
2 Hot gas bypass required - 2 circuits
Q Special hot gas bypass required
X No option required
GAUGE PIN 34
Q Special quote
X No option required
OVERLOAD PIN 35
Q Special quote

24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Product identification number (PIN) (cont’d)

FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

X No option required 2
PIN 36 PIN 36
Q Special quote
X Crankcase heater standard
HTR Crankcase Heater (Pin 37)
Q Special crankcase heater required
X No option required
DWP DWP (PIN 38)
Q Special quote
X No option required
INS Insulation (PIN 39)
Q Special quote
X No option required
FLANGES Flanges (PIN 40)
Q Special quote
X No option required
FLOW Flow Switch (PIN 41)
Q Special quote
X No option required
VESSEL Vessel Codes (PIN 42)
Q Special quote
X No option required
CLR Cooler (PIN 43)
Q Special quote
X No option required
PIN44 PIN 44
Q Special quote
X Aluminum coil
B Pre-coated fin coil
COILS Coils (PIN 45) C Copbeforecoil
P Post-coated dipped coil
Q Special coil
X No option required
PIN46 PIN 46
Q Special quote
X TEAO fan motors
FANMOTORS Fan Motors (PIN 47)
Q Special fan motors required
1 Wire enclosures - factory
ENCL Enclosure Panels (PIN 48) 7 Louvered enclosure - factory
Q Special enclosure panels
X No acoustic blanket required
ACOUSTIC Acoustic Blanket (PIN 49) B Acoustic blanket required
Q Special acoustic blanket required
X No documents required
A Base, material and witness documents
B Base document
SRDOCS SR Documents (PIN 50)
M Base and material documents
W Base and witness documents
Q Special quote
X No option required
PIN51 PIN 51
Q Special quote
X Standard low sound fans required
FANS Sound Fans (PIN 52) L Ultra low sound fans required
Q Special sound fans required

JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Product identification number (PIN) (cont’d)

FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
X No option required
PAINT PIN 53
Q Special quote
X No isolators required
1 1 In. deflection isolators required
ISOL
Vibration Isolators (PIN 54) N Neoprene isolators required
S Seismic isolators required
Q Special isolators required
WARRANTY Warranty (PIN 55) Marketing purposes only!
REFWTY Refrigerant Wty (PIN 56) Marketing purposes only!
X No containerization required
A Buy American Act compliance
Both Buy American Act compliance and container
B
SHIP Ship Instructions (PIN 57) shipping kit (factory prep)
C Container shipping kit (factory load)
P Container shipping kit (factory prep)
Q Special quote
PIN 58 PIN 58 Marketing purposes only!
X No option required
PKG Pump package (PIN 59)
Q Special quote
X No option required
PKGOPT Pump Package Options (PIN 60)
Q Special quote
MFG Plant of Mfg (PIN 61) R Plant of manufacture - Monterrey
CUR Curitiba, Brazil
MEX Mexico, ES
LOC Mfg location
MTY Monterrey, BE
SAT San Antonio, Texas
CV YorkWorks configuration version {YW/CV}
YW YorkWorks version
UV YorkWorks upload version {YW/UV}
SQ Special quote Q Special quote

26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
 AIR COOLED CONDENSERS

YCUL
YCUL REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM
NOTE: YCUL0046-0090
YCUL0045-0072 HAVE TWO REFRIGERANT SYSTEMS
* HOT GAS OPTION - SYSTEM 1 ONLY
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS
LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE

Figure 5 - Refrigerant Flow Diagram

LIQUID LINE
FILTER DRIER

LIQUID LINE AIR FLOW

SOLENOID VALVE
* SOLENOID OPERATED
HOT GAS BYPASS VALVE
SIGHT GLASS /
T
MOISTURE INDICATOR

** TXV
OPI. L
EVCA
DX
OPTIONAL DISCHARGE DISCHARGE AIR
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

SERVICE VALVE
(OPTIONAL)
HIGH PRESSURE
CUTOUT SWITCH
Refrigerant flow diagram

SERVICE
VALVE
(OPTIONAL)

FACTORY PIPING
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH OR FIELD PIPING
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

OPTIONAL SUCTION
TEMP SENSOR
OIL EQUALIZING T
LINE
2 OR 3 COMPRESSORS PER SYSTEM

**One TXV and Liquid Line Solenoid shown for illustration purposes. Actual refrigerant piping may vary depending on evaporator circuiting.

27
LD04284A
Section 2 – Product description

2
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 2 – Product description
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Process and instrumentation diagram

Control Functions:
DV - Display Value Fans Fans
CHT - Chilled Liquid Temperature Components:
HPC - High Pressure Cutout
LPC - Low Pressure Cutout Pressure Relief Valve (ZP180 Scroll Only) *
HPL - High Pressure Load Limiting
LTC - Low Temperature Cutout Service (Ball) Valve

Expansion Valve
Condenser S
Solenoid Valve

Sight Glass

Sensor Pressure
or Temperature
DV
585 PSIG HPL P Service (Stop) Access Valve
PS HPC

650 PSIG PS Pressure Switch

Filter Drier
(Removable Core)
See P.R.V .
Options
ZCPR-3 ZCPR-2 ZCPR-1

450 PSIG

Evaporator Coil
Compressors

DV
LPC P Ambient Air Sensor
DV
HTC T
LTC

-YLLSV

* Smaller Compressor Scrolls Utilize Internal Reliefs.

LD13139

Figure 6 - Process and Instrumentation Diagram

Low pressure liquid refrigerant enters the cooler and high pressure vapor is fed to the air cooled condenser
is evaporated and superheated by the heat energy ab- coil and fans where the heat is removed. The fully con-
sorbed from the chilled liquid passing through the densed and subcooled liquid passes through the expan-
cooler shell. Low pressure vapor enters the compres- sion valve where pressure is reduced and further cool-
sor where pressure and superheat are increased. The ing takes place before returning to the DX Coil.

28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 3 – Handling and storage

Delivery and Storage Unit Rigging

To ensure consistent quality and maximum reliability, Use spreader bars to avoid lifting chains hitting the
all units are tested and inspected before leaving the fac- unit.
tory. Units are shipped completely assembled and con- 3
Never lift the unit using a forklift or by
taining refrigerant under pressure. Units are shipped hooking to the top rails. Use only the lift-
without export crating unless crating has been speci- ing holes provided.
fied on the Sales Order.
If the unit is to be put into storage, before installation,
the following precautions are observed:
Lifting Instructions are placed on a label on the unit
• The unit must be “blocked” so that the base is not and on the shipping bag.
permitted to sag or bow.
The unit should be lifted by inserting
• Ensure that all openings, such as water connec- hooks through the holes provided in unit
tions, are securely capped. base rails. Spreader bars should be used
• Do not store where exposed to ambient air tem- to avoid crushing the unit frame rails with
peratures exceeding 110°F (43°C). the lifting chains (See Figure 7).

• The condensers should be covered to protect the

fins from potential damage and corrosion, particu-
larly where building work is in progress.
• The unit should be stored in a location where there
is minimal activity in order to limit the risk of ac-
cidental physical damage.
• To prevent inadvertent operation of the pressure
relief devices the unit must not be steam cleaned.
• It is recommended that the unit is periodically in-
spected during storage.

Inspection
Immediately upon receiving the unit, it should be in-
spected for possible damage which may have occurred
during transit. If damage is evident, it should be noted
in the carrier’s freight bill. A written request for inspec-
tion by the carrier’s agent should be made at once. See
Instruction manual, Form 50.15-NM for more informa-
tion and details.
Major damage must be reported immediately to your
local Johnson Controls representative.
LD14326

Figure 7 - Unit Rigging

JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 3 – Handling and storage
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Moving the Condensing Unit Lifting Weights

Before moving the unit, ensure that the installation site For details of weights and weight distribution, refer to
is suitable for installing the unit and is easily capable the data shipped in the unit information packet and unit
of supporting the weight of the unit and all associated nameplate.
services.
The units are designed to be lifted using cables. A
spreader bar or frame should be used in order to pre-
vent damage to the unit from the lifting chains.
Units are provided with lifting eyes in the sides of the
base frame, which can be attached to directly using
shackles or safety hooks.
The unit must only be lifted by the base
frame at the points provided. Never move
the unit on rollers, or lift the unit using a
forklift truck.

Care must be taken to avoid damaging the condenser

cooling fins when moving the unit.

30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Section 4 – Installation

To ensure warranty coverage, this equip- In installations where winter operation is intended and
ment must be commissioned and serviced snow accumulations are expected, additional height
by an authorized Johnson Controls must be provided to ensure normal condenser air flow.
service mechanic or a qualified service
Clearances are listed in the Dimensions (English) section.
person experienced in equipment instal-
lation. Installation must comply with all Foundation
applicable codes, particularly in regard to
electrical wiring and other safety elements The unit should be mounted on a flat and level foun-
such as relief valves, HP cutout settings, dation, floor, or rooftop capable of supporting the en-
design working pressures, and ventilation tire operating weight of the equipment. See Table 6 on
requirements consistent with the amount page 42 for operating weight. If the unit is elevated
and type of refrigerant charge. beyond the normal reach of service personnel, a suit-
able catwalk must be capable of supporting service
Lethal voltages exist within the control personnel, their equipment, and the compressors.
panels. Before servicing, open and lock-
4
out/tagout all disconnect switches. Ground Level Locations
It is important that the units be installed on a sub-
Installation Checklist stantial base that will not settle. A one piece concrete
slab with footers extended below the frost line is
The following items, 1 through 5, must be checked be- highly recommended. Additionally, the slab should
fore placing the units in operation. not be tied to the main building foundations as noise
1. Inspect the unit for shipping damage. and vibration may be transmitted. Mounting holes are
provided in the steel channel for bolting the unit to its
2. Rig unit using spreader bars. foundation. See Dimensions (English).
3. Open the unit only to install water piping sys- For ground level installations, precautions should be
tem. Do not remove protective covers from water taken to protect the unit from tampering by or injury to
connections until piping is ready for attachment. unauthorized persons. Screws and/or latches on access
Check water piping to ensure cleanliness. panels will prevent casual tampering. However, further
4. Pipe unit using good piping practice (refer to safety precautions such as a fenced-in enclosure or
ASHRAE handbook section 215 and 195). locking devices on the panels may be advisable.

5. Check to see that the unit is installed and operated Rooftop Locations
within limitations. See Operational Limitations
Choose a spot with adequate structural strength to
(English).
safely support the entire weight of the unit and service
The following pages outline detailed procedures to be personnel. Care must be taken not to damage the roof.
followed to install and start-up the unit.
Consult the building contractor or architect if the roof is
Handling bonded. Roof installations should have wooden beams
(treated to reduce deterioration), cork, rubber, or vibra-
These units are shipped as completely assembled units tion isolators under the base to minimize vibration.
containing full operating charge, and care should be
taken to avoid damage due to rough handling. Noise Sensitive Locations
Efforts should be made to ensure that the unit is not
Location and Clearances
located next to occupied spaces or noise sensitive areas
These units are designed for outdoor installations on where unit noise level would be a problem. Unit noise
ground level, rooftop, or beside a building. Location is a result of compressor and fan operation. Consider-
should be selected for minimum sun exposure and to ations should be made utilizing noise levels published
ensure adequate supply of fresh air for the condenser. in the YORK Engineering Guide for the specific con-
The units must be installed with sufficient clearances densing unit model. Sound blankets for the compres-
for air entrance to the condenser coil, for air discharge sors and low sound fans are available.
away from the condenser, and for servicing access.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Corrosive Environments If the ducts from two or more fans are to be combined
Protection against corrosive environments is available into a common duct, back-flow dampers should be fit-
by supplying the units with either copbeforefin, cured ted in the individual fan ducts. This will prevent re-
phenolic, or epoxy coating on the condenser coils. The circulation of air when only one of the fans is running.
phenolic or epoxy coils should be offered with any Units are supplied with outlet guards for safety and to
units being installed at the seashore or where salt spray prevent damage to the fan blades. If these guards are
may hit the unit. removed to fit duct work, adequate alternative precau-
tions must be taken to ensure persons cannot be harmed
Spring Isolators (Optional)
or put at risk from rotating fan blades.
When ordered, four isolators will be furnished. Iden-
tify the isolator, locate at the probeforemounting point, Wiring
and adjust beforeinstructions. Condensing Units are shipped with all factory-mount-
ed controls wired for operation.
Compressor Mounting
The compressors are mounted on four rubber isolators. Field Wiring
The mounting bolts should not be loosened or adjusted Power wiring must be provided through a fused dis-
at installation of the chiller. connect switch to the unit terminals (or optional mold-
ed disconnect switch) in accordance with N.E.C. or lo-
Pipework Arrangement cal code requirements. Minimum circuit ampacity and
The following are suggested pipework arrangements maximum dual element fuse size are given in Electri-
for single unit installations. cal Data on page 46.

DuctWork Connection Only copbeforepower wiring should be used for sup-

plying power to the unit. This is recommended to avoid
Recommendations of the Building Services safety and reliability issues resulting from connection
Research Association failure at the power connections to the unit. Aluminum
wiring is not recommended due to thermal character-
General Requirements istics that may cause loose terminations resulting from
The following ductwork recommendations are intend- the contraction and expansion of the wiring. Alumi-
ed to ensure satisfactory operation of the unit. Failure num oxide may also build up at the termination causing
to follow these recommendations could cause damage hot spots and eventual failure. If aluminum wiring is
to the unit, or loss of performance, and may invalidate used to supply power to the unit, AL-CU compression
the warranty. fittings should be used to transition from aluminum to
copper. This transition should be done in an external
When ducting is to be fitted to the fan discharge it is box separate to the power panel. Copbeforeconductors
recommended that the duct must be the same cross- can then be run from the box to the unit.
sectional area as the fan outlet and straight for at least 3
ft (1 m) to obtain static regain from the fan. Duct work A 120-1-60, 15 A source must be supplied for the control
should be suspended with flexible hangers to prevent panel through a fused disconnect when a control panel
noise and vibration being transmitted to the structure. transformer (optional) is not provided (see Figure 9).
A flexible joint is also recommended between the duct See unit wiring diagrams for field and
attached to the fan and the next section for the same power wiring connections, alarm con-
reason. Flexible connectors should not be allowed to tacts, compressor run status contacts,
concertina. PWM input, and load limit input. See
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS for a
The unit(s) is not designed to take structural loading.
detailed description of operation concern-
No significant amount of weight should be allowed to
ing aforementioned contacts and inputs.
rest on the fan outlet flange, deck assemblies or con-
denser coil module. No more than 3 ft (1 m) of light
construction duct work should be supported by the
unit. Where cross winds may occur, any duct work
must be supported to prevent side loading on the unit.

32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

System Run Contacts Remote Emergency Cutoff

Contacts are available to monitor system status. Normal- Immediate shutdown of the chiller can be accomplished
ly‑open auxiliary contacts from each compressor contac- by opening a field-installed dry contact to break the
tor are wired in parallel with TB1 – Terminals 25 to 26 for electrical circuit between Terminals 5 to L on Terminal
system 1, and TB1 – Terminals 27 to 28 for system 2. See Block TB1. The unit is shipped with a factory jumbe-
Figure 4 on page 22, Figure 11 on page 39, and the foreinstalled between Terminals 5 to L, which must be
unit wiring diagrams starting on page 52. removed if emergency shutdown contacts are installed.
See Figure 11 on page 39 and the unit wiring diagrams
Alarm Status Contacts starting on page 52.
Normally‑open contacts are available for each refriger-
ant system. These normally‑open contacts close when Remote Temp Reset Input
the system is functioning normally. The respective The Remote Temp Reset input allows reset of the dis-
contacts will open when the unit is shut down on a unit charge air temperature setpoint by supplying a voltage
fault, or locked out on a system fault. Field connections or current signal field wiring should be connected to
are at TB1 - Terminals 29 to 30 (system 1), and Termi- CTB1 – Terminals A+ to A-. A detailed explanation is 4
nals 31 to 32 (system 2). provided in the Unit Control section. See Figure 3 on
page 21, Figure 4 on page 22, and the unit wiring
Remote Start/Stop Contacts diagrams starting on page 52.
To remotely start or stop a single circuit unit, wire a
dry contact in series with the flow switch and then con- Load Limit Input
nect it to terminals 13 to 51 of CTB1. See Figure 4 on Load limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from
page 22, Figure 11 on page 39, and the unit wiring loading beyond a desired value. The unit can be load
diagrams starting on page 52. limited either 33%, 40%, 50%, 66% or 80%, depend-
ing on the number of compressors on unit. The field
To remotely start or stop a dual system unit, individu- connections are wired to CTB1 – Terminals 13 to 21,
ally wire two dry contacts in series with the correspon- and work in conjunction with the PWM inputs. A de-
dent thermostat, then respectively connect them to ter- tailed explanation is provided in the Unit Control sec-
minals 13 to 51 (System #1) and 13 to 50 (System #2) tion. See Figure 4 on page 22, Figure 11 on page 39
of CTB1, as shown left on Figure 8. The other option is and the unit wiring diagrams starting on page 52.
to wire only one dry contact to the common wire con-
nected to terminal 13 of CTB1, as shown on the right When using the Load Limit feature, the
on Figure 8. See Figure 4 on page 22, Figure 11 on PWM feature will not function – SIMUL-
page 39, and the unit wiring diagrams starting on page TANEOUS OPERATION OF LOAD
52. LIMITING AND TEMPERATURE
RESET (PWM INPUT) CANNOT BE
13 13 DONE.
20 20
13 13
Dry Contact of System #1 Single Dry Contact
21 21
14 14
Liquid Line Solenoid Connections
13 13 The field supplied and installed liquid line solenoid
51 51 valves should be installed at the evaporator and wired
13 13 using 18 AWG minimum wire. Electrical connections
50 50 should be made at Terminal Board TB1. TB1 is located
CBT1 CBT1 in the power panel on the left side of the power panel.
Note that power for the solenoid coil is 120 VAC.
Dry Contact of System #2 LD28300 See Figure 11 on page 39 and the unit wiring diagrams
Figure 8 - W
 iring Options for Remotely Start or Stop starting on page 52.
the Dual System Unit

JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Discharge Air Sensor Relief Valves

The discharge air sensor and associated connector Relief valves are located on both the high and low
hardware are field supplied and installed. Field wire pressure side of the piping. The high side relief valve
must be field supplied (QUABBIN 930421-2 or equiv- pressure setting is 650 psig. The low side relief valve
alent 2 conductor with shield and drain wire - 20 AWG pressure setting is 450 psig.
300 V 60°C - polyethylene insulation UV resistant).
Field wiring is connected to pins 2, 5, and 8 of J6 on High Pressure Cutout
the microboard. See Figure 4 on page 22, and the unit
A high pressure cutout is installed in the discharge pip-
wiring diagrams starting on page 52.
ing of each system. The cutout opens at 585 psig plus
or minus 10 psig and closes at 440 psig plus or minus
Zone Thermostats, Suction Pressure Control
25 psig.
Only (Remote Start/Stop)
Field supplied thermostats or dry contacts must be Compressor Heaters
field wired to start/stop the respective system when
Compressor heaters are standard on all models. If pow-
operating the unit in Suction Pressure Control
er is OFF more than two hours, the crankcase heaters
Mode. The System 1 zone thermostat is field wired at
must be energized for 18 to 24 hours before restarting
CTB1 terminals 13 to 50. On two system units, System
a compressor. This will ensure that liquid slugging and
2 zone thermostat is field wired to CTB1 terminals 13
oil dilution does not damage the compressors on start.
to 51. CTB1 terminal is located near the bottom of the
micro control panel. See Figure 4 on page 22, and Refrigerant Piping
the unit wiring diagrams starting on page 52.
General
Air Proving Switch/Remote Start-Stop Contacts
When the unit has been located in its final position, the
The air flow switch must not be used to unit piping may be connected. Normal installation pre-
start and stop the chiller (for example, cautions should be observed in order to receive maxi-
starting and stopping the blower). It is mum operating efficiencies. System piping should con-
intended only as a safety switch, so it can- form to the YORK DX piping guide Form 50.40-ES2
not be jumped out. or ASHRAE refrigeration handbook guidelines. All
piping design and installation is the responsibility of
The air proving switch is field wired to CTB1 termi- the user.
nals 13 to 14 to prevent operation of the refrigerant cir-
JOHNSON CONTROLS ASSUMES NO WAR-
cuit when the supply air blower is not operating.
RANTY RESPONSIBILITY FOR SYSTEM OP-
If separate evaporator blowers are used with respect ERATION OR FAILURES DUE TO IMPROBe-
to each refrigerant system in the condensing unit, then forePIPING, PIPING DESIGN, CONTROL
two air proving switches (used for each blower) must PROBLEMS, OR LACK OF OIL RETURN.
be wired in series across CTB1 terminals 13 to 14. See
All expansion valves, liquid line solenoid valves, filter
Figure 11 on page 39 and the unit wiring diagrams
driers, sight glasses, refrigerant, and refrigerant piping
starting on page 52.
are supplied and installed by others. TXV sizing must
Evaporator Blower Start Contacts be equal in size or slightly smaller than the capacity of
the circuit. If multiple coil sections are utilized, a TXV
For constant fan operation: Terminal block TB1 - ter- for each section (sized accordingly) must be installed.
minals 23 to 24, are normally open contacts that can be
used to switch field supplied power to provide a start
signal to the evaporator blower contactor. Contacts will
close whenever the daily schedule is programmed for
cooling. See Figure 11 on page 39 and the unit wiring
diagrams starting on page 52.

34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Refrigerant Piping Reference

R-410A CopbeforeLine Sizing ASTM B280, type “L” pipe, 2-1/8 in. diameter has a
When selecting pipe diameter and material for piping pressure rating of 608 psi beforeASME B31.5-2006 sec-
R-410A systems such as used with YCUL chillers, it tion 504.1.2, with an additional 20% increase allowed in
is recommended that ASTM B280 material, type “L” section 502.2.3 “Ratings: Allowance for Variations from
or “K” is used. According to ASME Standard B31.5- Normal Operation” for a maximum allowable pressure of
2006 (table 502.3.1), ASTM B280 copbeforedoes not 730 psi.
require a derate when brazed. By comparison, ASTM Type “K” pipe (thicker wall), beforeASME B31.5-
B88 material does take an annealing penalty when 2006 section 504.1.2, has a rating of 725 psi before the
brazing, which in some applications, could reduce the additional 20% allowance is taken.
calculated yield strength to a level below the system
design. For more details, refer to ASHRAE Refrigeration
Handbook, Chapter 2 and YORK DX Piping Guide
YCUL Line Sizing Notes Form 50.40-ES2.
The YCUL chiller has a maximum design working
4
Table 4 on page 36 lists refrigerant line connections
pressure of 560 psig, a mechanical high pressure cut-
sizes beforeunit model number.
out to shut the unit OFF at 585 psig, and (the unit) is
rated at 650 psig. The maximum discharge pipe diam-
eter used on YCUL is 2-1/8 in..

Table 1 - Fitting Equivalent Lengths Table 2 - Refrigerant Piping Charges

*COPBEFOREFITTING EQUIVALENT LENGTHS R410A SUCT @ 36 DEG LIQ @ 105 DEG
LINE SIZE O.D. SHORT- LONG-RADIUS SUCTION LINES
RADIUS ELL ELL DENSITY
CU OZ/ GRAMS/
3/4 in. (19 mm) 6.5 ft (2 m) 4.5 ft (1.4 m) SIZE ID LB/CU
FT FT 30 CM
7/8 in. (22 mm) 7.8 ft (2.4 m) 5.3 ft (1.6 m) FT

1-1/8 in. (29 mm) 2.7 ft (0.8 m) 1.9 ft (0.6 m) 1-3/8 in. (35 mm) 1.3 0.0 2.1 0.3 8.1

1-3/8 in. (35 mm) 3.2 ft (1 m) 2.2 ft (0.7 m) 1-5/8 in. (41 mm) 1.5 0.0 2.1 0.4 11.5

1-5/8 in. (41 mm) 3.8 ft (1.2 m) 2.6 ft (8 m) 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) 2.0 0.0 2.1 0.7 20.0

2-1/8 in. (54 mm) 5.2 ft (1.6 m) 3.4 ft (1 m) 2-5/8 in. (67 mm) 2.5 0.0 2.1 1.1 30.9

2-5/8 in. (67 mm) 6.5 ft (20 m) 4.2 ft (1.3 m) LIQUID LINES
3/4 in. (19 mm) 0.7 0.0 60.9 2.4 66.8
7/8 in. (22 mm) 0.8 0.0 60.9 3.3 92.8
1-1/8 in. (29 mm) 1.0 0.0 60.9 5.6 158.3
1-3/8 in. (35 mm) 1.3 0.0 60.9 8.5 241.1

JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 3 - Miscellaneous Liquid Line Pressure Drops

*MISCELLANEOUS LIQUID LINE PRESSURE
SOLENOID VALVE 2 psi to 3 psi (13.8 kPa to 20.7 kPa)
FILTER/DRIER 2 psi to 3 psi (13.8 kPa to 20.7 kPa)
SIGHT GLASS 0.5 psi (3.4 kPa)

*Pressure drops or equivalent length values are approximate. If more precise value is desired, consult ASHRAE Refrigerant Handbook.

Table 4 - Refrigerant Line Connections

COPBEFORETYPE L NOMINAL TONS
SYSTEM INCHES OD
YCUL TONS (kW)
NUMBER
SUCTION LIQUID UNLOADED
0020EE 17.0 1 1-5/8 7/8 8.5
0024EE 20.1 1 1-5/8 7/8 10.1
0031EE 27.0 1 2-1/8 1-1/8 12.3
0035EE 30.9 1 2-1/8 1-1/8 15.5
1 2-1/8 1-1/8 10.4
0045EE 41.6
2 2-1/8 1-1/8 10.4
1 2-1/8 1-1/8 11.7
0051EE 44.1
2 2-1/8 1-1/8 10.4
1 2-1/8 1-1/8 12.9
0055EE 51.6
2 2-1/8 1-1/8 12.9
1 2-1/8 1-1/8 14.9
0065EE 59.5
2 2-1/8 1-1/8 14.9
1 2-3/8 1-1/8 21.9
0072EE 73.5
2 2-1/8 1-1/8 14.9

Refrigerant Piping Notes

1. Based on R-410A at the nominal capacity of the unit or system, an ambient temperature of 95°F (35°C) and a suction temperature of 45°F
(7.2°C).
2. Suction line sizes were calculated based on a nominal maximum pressure drop to 3 psi/100 ft. (20.7 kPa/30.5 m). When calculating suction
line pressure drop for a specific application, it should be noted that system capacity decreases as suction line pressure drop increases.
3. Nominal Tons (kW) Unloaded is based on one compressor (beforesystem) operating at design conditions.
4. Based on minimum compressor staging for the given pipe size, a double suction riser should be used to ensure probeforeoil return to the
compressor on all vertical suction risers. Oil returning up the riser moves up the inner surface of the pipe and depends on the mass velocity
of the refrigerant vapor at the wall surface to move the oil up the vertical rise.
5. Hot gas bypass lines are typically 7/8 in. for lines up to 40 ft and 1 1/8 in. for lines over 40 ft in length (12 m). The field connections sizes
are 7/8 in. for the optional factory mounted hot gas bypass valve. Note: Hot gas bypass is only available for refrigerant system number 1.
6. For more information, refer to either the YORK DX Piping Guide (Form 050.40-ES2) or the ASHRAE Refrigertion Handbook.

Hot gas bypass is only available for

refrigerant system number 1.

36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Refrigerant Line Sizing Condenser Below Evaporator

Refrigerant piping systems must be designed to pro- When the condensing unit is located below the evapo-
vide practical line sizes without excessive pressure rator, the liquid line must be designed for both friction
drops, prevent compressor oil from being “trapped” loss and static head loss due the vertical rise. The value
in the refrigerant piping, and ensure probeforeflow of of static head loss of 0.5 psi/ft.(3.4 kPa/30 cm) must be
liquid refrigerant to the thermal expansion valve. Con- added to the friction loss pressure drop in addition to
siderations should be given to: all pressure drops due to driers, valves, etc.
1. Suction line pressure drop due to refrigerant flow. Oil Traps
2. Suction line refrigerant velocity for oil return. All horizontal suction lines should be pitched at least
1/4 in. beforefoot (6 mm) in the direction of the refrig-
3. Liquid line pressure drop due to refrigerant flow. erant flow to aid in the return of oil to the compres-
4. Liquid line pressure drop (or gain) due to vertical sor. All suction lines with a vertical rise exceeding 3 ft
rise of the liquid line. (0.91 m) should have a “P” trap at the bottom and top
of the riser to facilitate oil return. Suction lines with a 4
Table 4 on page 36 provides the pipe sizes for both vertical rise exceeding 25 ft (7.6 m) should be trapped
liquid and suction lines. Read the notes under the table
and refer to YORK DX Piping Guide (Form 050.40- every 15 ft (4.6 m).
ES2) or ASHRAE Refrigeration Handbook for detailed For more details, refer to ASHRAE Refrigeration
information. Handbook, System Practices for Halocarbon Refriger-
Nominal pressure drop for solenoids, sight glass, and ants, or YORK DX Piping Guide (Form 050.40-ES2).
driers are shown in Table 3 on page 36. Suction oil traps are not required, if the vapor velocity
in the suction line is enough to carry back the oil. Add-
Table 1 on page 35 includes approximate equivalent
ing an oil separator in the discharge line is helpful to
lengths for copbeforefittings.
mitigate the risk of oil return.
To ensure a solid column of liquid refrigerant to the ex-
pansion valve, the total liquid line pressure drop should Refrigerant Charge
never exceed 50 psi (3.4 bar). Refrigerant vapor in the The condensing unit is charged with a nitrogen hold-
liquid line will measurably reduce valve capacity and ing charge. The remaining operating charge for the
poor system performance can be expected. condensing unit, evaporator coil, and refrigerant pip-
ing must be “weighed-in” after all refrigerant piping is
To allow adequate oil return to the compressor, suc- installed, leak checked, and evacuated.
tion risers should be sized for a minimum of 1000 FPM
(5.08 m/s) while the system is operating at minimum 70% of the calculated charge must be
capacity to ensure oil return up the suction riser. See added before starting a system. Failure
Table 4 under column labeled “Nominal Tons (kW) to add 70% of the charge may cause
Unloaded”. For additional details, refer to ASHRAE compressor overheating when the system
Refrigeration Handbook, Chapter 2. is first started.

Evaporator Below Condensing Unit Final adjustment of the refrigerant charge should be
On a system where the evaporator is located below the verified by subcooling values (see SECTION 6 – COM-
condensing unit, the suction line must be sized for both MISSIONING for checking subcooling). See Table 2
pressure drop and oil return. In some cases a double on page 35 for Refrigerant Line Charges.
suction riser must be installed to ensure reliable oil re-
turn at reduced loads. Table 4 indicates when a double Refrigerant Piping Reference
suction riser should be used for listed pipe sizes to pro- For more details, refer to ASHRAE Refrigeration
vide adequate oil return at reduced loads. The calculat- Handbook, Chapter 2.
ed information was based on maintaining a minimum
of 1000 fpm (5.08 m/s) refrigerant vapor velocity at Filter Driers / Sight Glasses / TXVs
full load. All expansion valves, liquid line solenoid valves, filter
driers, sight glasses, refrigerant, and refrigerant piping
are supplied and installed by others.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 37
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Single-point supply connection – terminal block, non-fused

disconnect switch, or circut breaker
Power Panel Control Panel

2
L
Terminal Block, MICROPANEL
NF Disconnect SW
or Circuit Breaker

CTB2 Flow Switch

1L1 1L2 1L3
GRD

13 14
CTB1

Field Provided 120-1-60

Micropanel Power Supply if Control
Transformer not Supplied
Field Provided Unit Power Supply

See electrical note 9

LD07719

Electrical Notes and Legend located on page 51.

It is possible that multiple sources of The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC.
power can be supplying the unit power Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the
panel. To prevent serious injury or death, unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
the technician should verify that NO can result in damage to the evaporator
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
the panel AFTER disconnecting power, freezing.
before working on equipment.

Figure 9 - Single-Point Supply Connection – Terminal Block, Non-Fused Disconnect Switch, or Circuit Breaker

J6-5 & J6-8 FIELD SUPPLIED WIRING

DISCHARGE AIR
J6-2 SHIELD QUABBIN 930421-2
SENSOR WITH
OR EQUIVALENT
BLK (SIGNAL) BLK (SIGNAL) MOUNTING BRACKET
RED (+5 VDC) RED (+5 VDC)
9 6 3 DRAIN (GND) DRAIN (GND)
8 5 2
7 4 1
7 4 1
J6 PIN
IDENTIFICATION
LD13345a
ON I/O

Figure 10 - Discharge Air Sensor Field Wiring

38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 4 – Installation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Control wiring

13 PWM INPUT (CAN ONLY BE USED WITH DISCHARGE AIR

20 TEMP CONTROL)

13
LOAD LIMIT INPUT
21
14
AIR FLOW SWITCH AND REMOTE START/STOP
13
51 SYSTEM 1 THERMOSTAT (SUCTION PRESSURE CONTROL ONLY)
13
50
SYSTEM 2 THERMOSTAT (SUCTION PRESSURE CONTROL ONLY)
CTB1 4
LD28295

GRD
2 POWER SUPPLY* 120V-1PH-60Hz L TO 2
L
REMOTE EMERGENCY CUTOFF
5
(MUST BE CLOSED TO OPERATE)
23
EVAP BLOWER STAR CONTACTS
24
GRD
25
CHILLER RUN STATUS SYSTEM 1
26
27
CHILLER RUN STATUS SYSTEM 2
28
GRD
29
SYS # 1 ALARM STATUS
30
31
SYS # 2 ALARM STATUS (ON 2ND CIRCUIT ONLY)
32
GRD * Factory wired with optional transformer.

TB1 LD28296

It is possible that multiple sources of The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC.
power can be supplying the unit power Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the
panel. To prevent serious injury or death, unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
the technician should verify that NO can result in damage to the evaporator
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
the panel AFTER disconnecting power, freezing.
before working on equipment.

Figure 11 - Control Wiring

JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

40 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 5 – Technical data

Operational limitations (English)
Excessive flow causes damage to the
cooler. Do not exceed the maximum cooler
flow. Special care should be taken when
multiple chillers are fed by a single pump.

Notes:
1. For leaving brine temperature below 40°F (4.4°C), contact your nearest Johnson Controls Office for application requirements.
2. For leaving water temperature higher than 55°F (12.8°C), contact the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines.
3. The evaporator is protected against freezing to -20°F (-28.8°C) with an electric heater as standard.
4. For operation at temperatures below 25°F (-3.9°C), the optional Low Ambient Kit will need to be installed
5. For operation at temperatures above 115°F (46.1°C), the optional High Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system.

Voltage Limitations Table 5 - Voltage Limitations

UNIT POWER MIN. MAX.
The following voltage limitations are absolute and 5
operation beyond these limitations may cause serious 200-3-60 180 220
damage to the compressor. 230-3-60 207 253
380/415-3-60 342 440
460-3-60 414 506
380/415-3-50 342 440
575-3-60 517 633

JOHNSON CONTROLS 41
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Physical data (English)

YCUL0020_ – YCIL0072_

60 Hz

Table 6 - Physical Data (English)

MODEL NO. YCUL 0020EE 0024EE 0031EE 0035EE 0045EE 0051EE 0055EE 0065EE 0072EE
Length (in.) 109.8 109.8 118.6 118.6 144.8 144.8 144.8 144.8 153.6
Width (in.) 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 90.6 90.6 90.6 90.6 90.6
Height (in.) 46.1 46.1 50 50 47.8 47.8 62.6 62.6 62.6
Nominal Tons 17 20.1 27 30.9 41.6 44.1 51.6 59.5 73.5
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Refrig. Chg, Opt, R-410A (lb) ckt1/
17 25 40 45 35/35 40/35 45/45 50/50 65/65
ckt2
Oil Charge, gallons ckt1/ckt2 1.8 1.8 1.7 2.2 1.8/1.8 1.8/1.8 1.7/1.7 1.7/1.7 2.3/2.2
Shipping Alum. Fin Coils, lb 1454 1567 1798 2034 2942 2968 3196 3208 4097
Weight CopbeforeFin Coils, lb 1597 1781 2004 2240 3300 3326 3673 3685 4703
Operating Alum. Fin Coils, lb 1471 1592 1838 2079 2967 3001 3233 3245 4142
Weight CopbeforeFin Coils, lb 1614 1806 2044 2285 3325 3359 3710 3722 4748
Comp. 1 8 10 13 15 10 12 13 15 20
Comp. 2 8 10 15 15 10 12 13 15 20
Nominal
Comp. 3 – – – – – – – – –
Comp.
Comp. 4 – – – – 10 10 13 15 15
Capacity
Comp. 5 – – – – 10 10 13 15 15
Comp. 6 – – – – – – – – –
Total Face Area m2 35 35 44 44 87 87 116 116 128
Number of Ckt. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Condenser
Rows Deep Ckt. 2 – – – – 2 2 3 3 3
Fins beforeInch 17 17 13 13 17 17 17 17 13
Number of Ckt. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Condenser fans Ckt. 2 – – – – 2 2 2 2 2
Fans, Fan Power hp/fan 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Low Sound Fan RPM 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150
Total Chiller CFM 10670 10670 24600 24600 39500 39500 43333 43333 43333
Number of Ckt. 1 NA NA NA NA 2 2 2 2 2
Condenser fans Ckt. 2 NA NA NA NA 2 2 2 2 2
Fans, Fan Power hp/fan NA NA 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Ultra Quiet Fan RPM NA NA 850 850 850 850 850 850 850
Total Chiller CFM NA NA 24600 24600 39500 39500 43333 43333 43333

42 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Physical data (SI)

YCUL0020_ – YCUL0072_

50 Hz

Table 7 - Physical Data (SI)

MODEL NO. YCUL 0020EE 0024EE 0031EE 0035EE 0045EE 0051EE 0055EE 0065EE 0072EE
Length (mm) 2788.7 2788.7 3012.4 3012.4 3677.9 3677.9 3677.9 3677.9 3901.4
Width (mm) 1135.4 1135.4 1135.4 1135.4 2301.2 2301.2 2301.2 2301.2 2301.2
Height (mm) 1169.9 1169.9 1270 1270 1214.1 1214.1 1590 1590 1590
Nominal kW 49.9 58.4 78.1 91.1 146.3 155.1 181.5 209.3 258.5
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Refrig. Chg, Opt, R-410A (KG) ckt1/
7.7 11.3 18.1 20.4 15.9/15.9 18.1/15.9 20.4/20.4 22.7/22.7 29.5/29.5
ckt2
Oil Charge, LITERS ckt1/ckt2 6.8 6.8 6.4 8.3 6.8/6.8 6.8/6.8 6.4/6.4 6.4/6.4 8.7/8.3
Alum. Fin Coils, kg 659.5 710.8 815.6 922.6 1334.5 1346.3 1449.7 1455.1 1858.4
Shipping
CopbeforeFin Coils,
Weight 724.4 807.8 909 1016 1496.9 1508.6 1666 1671.5 2133.2
kg

Operating
Alum. Fin Coils, kg 667.2 722.1 833.7 943 1345.8 1361.2 1466.5 1471.9 1878.8 5
CopbeforeFin Coils,
Weight 732.1 819.2 927.1 1036.5 1508.2 1523.6 1682.8 1688.3 2153.7
kg
Comp. 1 25 30 42.2 45.7 35.1 42.2 45.7 52.7 70.3
Comp. 2 25 30 45.7 45.7 35.1 42.2 45.7 52.7 70.3
Nominal
Comp. 3 – – – – – – – – –
Comp.
Comp. 4 – – – – 35.1 35.1 45.7 52.7 52.7
Capacity
Comp. 5 – – – – 35.1 35.1 45.7 52.7 52.7
Comp. 6 – – – – – – – – –
Total Face Area ft2 8.1 8.1 10.8 10.8 11.9
Number of Ckt. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Condenser
Rows Deep Ckt. 2 – – – – 2 2 3 3 3
Fins beforeInch 17 17 13 13 17 17 17 17 13
Number of Ckt. 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Condenser fans Ckt. 2 – – – – 2 2 2 2 2
Fans,
Fan Power kW/fan 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Low
Fan RPM 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950
Sound
Total Chiller CFM 4195 4195 9672 9672 18641.7 18641.7 20450.7 20450.7 20450.7

JOHNSON CONTROLS 43
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical data

Number of Ckt. 1 NA NA NA NA 2 2 2 2 2
Condenser fans Ckt. 2 NA NA NA NA 2 2 2 2 2
Fans, Fan Power kW/fan NA NA 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Ultra Quiet Fan RPM NA NA 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Total Chiller L/s NA NA 9672 9672 18641.7 18641.7 20450.7 20450.7 20450.7

Table 8 - Micro Panel Power Supply

CONTROL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION,
UNIT VOLTAGE
POWER MCA SEE NOTE B
UNIT NF DISC SW
MODELS w/o NOTE A
VOLTAGE MIN MAX
CONTROL 115-1-60/50
TRANS 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V

-17 200-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V

-28 230-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
MODELS w/
-40 380-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 480V
CONTROL
-46 460-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 480V
TRANS
-50 380/415-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30A / 415V
-58 575-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 600V

It is possible that multiple sources of

power can be supplying the unit power
panel. To prevent serious injury or death,
the technician should verify that NO
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present inside
the panel AFTER disconnecting power,
before working on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses 120 VAC.
Disconnecting 120 VAC power from the
unit, at or below freezing temperatures,
can result in damage to the evaporator
and unit as a result of the chilled liquid
freezing.

Table 9 - Voltage Range

VOLTAGE CODE UNIT POWER MINIMUM MAXIMUM
-17 200-3-60 180 220
-28 230-3-60 207 253
-40 380/415-3-60 342 440
-46 460-3-60 414 506
-50 380/415-3-50 342 440
-58 575-3-60 517 633

44 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical notes
1. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on 5. Circuit breakers must be UL listed and CSA certi-
125% of the rated load amps for the largest mo- fied and maximum size is based on 225% of the
tor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100%
loads included in the circuit, beforeN.E.C. Article of the rated load amps for all other loads includ-
430‑24. If the optional Factory Mounted Con- ed in the circuit. Otherwise, HACR‑type circuit
trol Transformer is provided, add the following breakers must be used. Maximum HACR circuit
MCA values to the electrical tables for the system breaker rating is based on 225% of the rated load
providing power to the transformer: ‑17, add 2.5 amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated
amps; ‑28, add 2.3 amps; ‑40, add 1.5 amps, ‑46, load amps for all other loads included in the cir-
add 1.3 amps; ‑58, add 1 amps. cuit.

2. The minimum recommended disconnect switch is 6. The INCOMING WIRE RANGE is the minimum
based on 115% of the rated load amps for all loads and maximum wire size that can be accommodated
included in the circuit, beforeN.E.C. Article 440. by the unit wiring lugs. The (2) preceding the wire
range indicates the number of termination points
3. Minimum fuse size is based upon 150% of the available beforephase of the wire range specified.
rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% Actual wire size and number of wires beforephase
of the rated load amps for all other loads included must be determined based on the National Electri-
in the circuit to avoid nuisance trips at start‑up due cal Code, using copbeforeconnectors only. Field
to lock rotor amps. It is not recommended in ap- wiring must also comply with local codes.
plications where brown outs, frequent starting and
stopping of the unit, and/or operation at ambient 7. A ground lug is provided for each compressor sys- 5
temperatures in excess of 95ºF (35ºC) is antici- tem to accommodate a field grounding conduc-
pated. tor before NEC Table 250‑95. A control circuit
grounding lug is also supplied.
4. Maximum fuse size is based upon 225% of the
rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% 8. The supplied disconnect is a Disconnecting
of the rated load amps for all other loads included Means as defined in the NEC 100, and is intended
in the circuit, beforeN.E.C. Article 440-22. for isolating the unit for the available power sup-
ply to perform maintenance and troubleshooting.
This disconnect is not intended to be a Load Break
Device.
9. Field wiring by others which complies to the Na-
tional Electrical Code and Local Codes.

LEGEND
ACR-LINE ACROSS THE LINE START VOLTAGE CODE
C.B. CIRCUIT BREAKER -17 = 200-3-60
D.E. DUAL ELEMENT FUSE -28 = 230-3-60
DISC SW DISCONNECT SWITCH -40 = 380-3-60
FACT MOUNT CB FACTORY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER -46 = 460-3-60
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
-50 = 380/415-3-50
HZ HERTZ
-58 = 575-3-60
MAX MAXIMUM
MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY
MIN MINIMUM
MIN NF MINIMUM NON FUSED
RLA RATED LOAD AMPS
S.P. WIRE SINGLE POINT WIRING
UNIT MTD SERV SW UNIT MOUNTED SERVICE (NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH)
LRA LOCKED ROTOR AMPS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 45
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical data
YCUL0020 - YCUL0072

MAX SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2

MINIMUM MIN
CHILLER MIN N/F DUAL COMPR 1 COMPR 2 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 FAN
CIRCUIT DUAL
MODEL VOLT HZ DISC SW ELEM
AMPS ELEM
YCUL MDSW FUSE RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
MCA FUSE
MAX CB
200 60 101 150 125 125 42.2 250 42.2 250 2 7.6 30.9
230 60 94 100 110 125 39 250 39 250 2 7.4 37
380 60 54 60 60 70 22.5 155 22.5 155 2 4.5 22.3
0020
400 50 45 60 50 60 18.6 114 18.6 114 2 4 19
460 60 45 60 50 60 18.6 114 18.6 114 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 36 60 40 50 14.9 100 14.9 100 2 2.9 14.6
200 60 108 150 125 150 45.4 250 45.4 250 2 7.6 30.9
230 60 100 150 125 125 42 250 42 250 2 7.4 37
380 60 58 60 70 80 24.2 155 24.2 155 2 4.5 22.3
0024
400 50 48 60 60 60 20 125 20 125 2 4 19
460 60 48 60 60 60 20 125 20 125 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 39 60 45 50 16 100 16 100 2 2.9 14.6
200 60 136 150 175 175 55.8 425 51.3 300 2 7.6 30.9
230 60 136 150 150 175 55.8 425 51.3 300 2 7.4 37
380 60 81 100 90 110 36 239 26.9 189 2 4.5 22.3
0031
400 50 65 100 80 90 26.9 198 23.1 150 2 4 19
460 60 64 100 80 90 26.9 198 23.1 150 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 55 60 70 70 23.7 148 19.9 109 2 2.9 14.6
200 60 151 200 175 200 59.9 425 59.9 425 2 7.6 30.9
230 60 140 150 175 175 55.5 425 55.5 425 2 7.4 37
380 60 81 100 90 110 32 239 32 239 2 4.5 22.3
0035
400 50 68 100 80 90 26.4 198 26.4 198 2 4 19
460 60 67 100 80 90 26.4 187 26.4 187 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 54 60 60 70 21.1 148 21.1 148 2 2.9 14.6
200 60 224 250 250 250 45.4 250 45.4 250 2 7.6 44 45.4 250 45.4 250 2 7.6 44
230 60 209 250 225 250 42 250 42 250 2 7.4 37 42 250 42 250 2 7.4 37
380 60 121 150 150 150 24.2 155 24.2 155 2 4.5 22.3 24.2 155 24.2 155 2 4.5 22.3
0045
400 50 102 150 110 110 20 125 20 125 2 4 19 20 125 20 125 2 4 19
460 60 99 150 110 110 20 125 20 125 2 3.4 17.2 20 125 20 125 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 80 100 90 90 16 100 16 100 2 2.9 14.6 16 100 16 100 2 2.9 14.6
200 60 228 250 250 250 47 250 47 250 2 7.6 44 45.4 250 45.4 250 2 7.6 44
230 60 212 250 225 250 43.5 250 43.5 250 2 7.4 37 42 250 42 250 2 7.4 37
380 60 123 150 150 150 25.1 155 25.1 155 2 4.5 22.3 24.2 155 24.2 155 2 4.5 22.3
0051
400 50 103 150 110 110 20.7 125 20.7 125 2 4 19 20 125 20 125 2 4 19
460 60 101 150 110 110 20.7 125 20.7 125 2 3.4 17.2 20 125 20 125 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 81 100 90 90 16.6 100 16.6 100 2 2.9 14.6 16 100 16 100 2 2.9 14.6
200 60 248 400 300 300 51.3 300 51.3 300 2 7.6 44 51.3 300 51.3 300 2 7.6 44
230 60 248 400 300 300 51.3 300 51.3 300 2 7.4 19.1 51.3 300 51.3 300 2 7.4 19.1
380 60 132 150 150 150 26.9 139 26.9 139 2 4.5 23.1 26.9 139 26.9 139 2 4.5 23.1
0055
400 50 106 150 125 125 21.8 140 21.8 140 2 3.4 17.5 21.8 140 21.8 140 2 3.4 17.5
460 60 114 150 125 125 23.1 150 23.1 150 2 4 19 23.1 150 23.1 150 2 4 19
575 60 96 150 110 110 19.9 109 19.9 109 2 2.9 15.3 19.9 109 19.9 109 2 2.9 15.3

See Electrical Notes on page 45.

46 JOHNSON CONTROLS
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical data
YCUL0020 - YCUL0072

MAX SYSTEM # 1 SYSTEM # 2

MINIMUM MIN
CHILLER MIN N/F DUAL COMPR 1 COMPR 2 FAN COMPR 1 COMPR 2 FAN
CIRCUIT DUAL
MODEL VOLT HZ DISC SW ELEM
AMPS ELEM
YCUL MDSW FUSE RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
MCA FUSE
MAX CB
200 60 268 400 300 300 55.8 425 55.8 425 2 7.6 44 55.8 425 55.8 425 2 7.6 44
230 60 267 400 300 300 55.8 425 55.8 425 2 7.4 19.1 55.8 425 55.8 425 2 7.4 19.1
380 60 171 200 200 200 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 23.1 36 239 36 239 2 4.5 23.1
0065
400 50 114 150 125 125 23.7 198 23.7 198 2 3.4 17.5 23.7 198 23.7 198 2 3.4 17.5
460 60 130 150 150 150 26.9 187 26.9 187 2 4 19 26.9 187 26.9 187 2 4 19
575 60 112 150 125 125 23.7 148 23.7 148 2 2.9 15.3 23.7 148 23.7 148 2 2.9 15.3
200 60 324 400 350 400 76.9 505 76.9 505 2 7.6 30.9 59.9 425 59.9 425 2 7.6 30.9
230 60 301 400 350 350 71.2 505 71.2 505 2 7.4 37 55.5 425 55.5 425 2 7.4 37
380 60 175 200 200 200 41.1 280 41.1 280 2 4.5 22.3 32 239 32 239 2 4.5 22.3
0072
400 50 146 200 175 175 33.9 225 33.9 225 2 4 19 26.4 198 26.4 198 2 4 19
460 60 143 200 175 175 33.9 225 33.9 225 2 3.4 17.2 26.4 187 26.4 187 2 3.4 17.2
575 60 115 150 125 125 27.1 180 27.1 180 2 2.9 14.6 21.1 148 21.1 148 2 2.9 14.6
5

JOHNSON CONTROLS 47
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 10 - Lug Ranges

FIELD WIRING LUGS FIELD WIRING LUGS FIELD WIRING LUGS
TERMINAL BLOCK (STD) NF DISC. SWITCH (OPT) CIRCUIT BREAKER (OPT)
YCUL HZ VOLT
LUGS/ LUGS/ LUGS/
LUG WIRE RANGE LUG WIRE RANGE LUG WIRE RANGE
PHASE PHASE PHASE
60 200 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 230 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
0020
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 200 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 230 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
0024
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 200 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 230 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
0031
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 200 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 230 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
0035
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0 1 14 AWG – 1/0
60 200 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 230 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
0045
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 200 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 230 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
0051
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 200 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 230 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
0055
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 200 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 230 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 2 *(2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil
60 380 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
0065
50 400 1 14 AWG-2/0, PB-0800 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 460 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 575 1 14 AWG – 2/0 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 200 1 4 AWG – 500 kcmil 1 250 kcmil – 500 kcmil 1 250 kcmil – 500 kcmil
60 230 1 4 AWG – 500 kcmil 1 250 kcmil – 500 kcmil 1 250 kcmil – 500 kcmil
60 380 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
0072
50 400 1 6 AWG-350kcmil, PB-0801 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 460 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil
60 575 1 6 AWG – 350 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kcmil 1 4 AWG – 300 kmcil

48 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical notes and legend

DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION

ACC Accessory - MP Motor Pump
- ADIS Display Board NU Not Used
- AMB Micro Board PE Protective Earth
- BAMB Ambient Pulse Width Modulation Temp Reset
PWM
- BDAT Discharge Air Temperature Or Remote Unload 2nd Step
- BDP Discharge Pressure - QCB Circuit Breaker
- BECT Entring Chilled Temperature Manual Motor Starter
- QMMSC
Compressor
Leaving Chilled Temperature
- BLCT - QMMSP Manual Motor Starter Pump
Not Fitted On Remote Evap Units
-BMP Motor Protector Compressor - QSD Switch Disconnect
- BSP Suction Pressure R Resistor
- CPF Capacitor Power Factor RED Red
- ECH Crankcase Heater RP Run Permissive
- EEH Evaporator Heater RU Remote Unload 1St Step
- EHRH Heat Recovery Heater SCH Thermostat Crankcase Heater
- EPH Pump Heater SCR Screen
5
- EXT External To Control Panel - SF Flow Switch
-F Fuse - SKP Keypad
- FHP High Pressure Cutout - SOA Switch Off Auto
- FSC Fan Speed Controller - SZT Zone Thermostat
Fan Speed Inhibit Two Speed -T Transformer
- FSI
Fan Option Only - TC Transformer Current
GND Ground - UBR Brigde Recfifier
G/Y Green / Yellow - WHT White
J Plug Board Connector Plugs Between Pow./Microboard.
- XP
-K Circuit Board Relay Section
Fan Contactor Line - XTBC Terminal Block Customer
- KF
(Including Coil Suppressor) - XTBF Terminal Block Factory
Fan Contactor High Speed - YESV Evaporator Solenoid Valve
- KFH
(Including Coil Suppressor) Hot Gas Solenoid Valve (Including Coil
- YHGSV
Fan Contactor Low Speed Suppressor)
- KFL
(Including Coil Suppressor) Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Field
- KFOL Fan Overload - YLLSV Mounted And Wired On Remote Evap.
- KFS Relay Fan Speed Units
- KH Heater Relay - ZCPR Compressor
Compressor Contactor (Including Coil NB Note Well {See Note}
- KM
Suppressor)
Wiring And Items Shown Thus Are
- KCR Control Relay Standard York Accessories
Pump Contactor Part Wiring And Items Shown Thus Are Not
- KP
(Including Coil Suppressor) Supplied By York
- KT Relay Timer Items Thus Enclosed Form A
-M Compressor Motor Components Or Sets Of Components
- MF Motor Fan
035-21966-101 REVG

JOHNSON CONTROLS 49
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical notes and legend (cont’d)

GENERAL
a. This drawing is based on IEC symbols.
Field wiring to be in accordance with the relevant electrical code as well as all other applicable codes and
b.
specifications.
All sources of supply shown on this diagram to be taken from one main isolator, not shown or supplied by
c.
YORK.
Green and yellow wire is used for earth, multi-colored cable used for low voltage. Red wire used for AC
d. Control, blue wire for neutral, black wire for AC and DC power. Orange wire should be used for interlock
control wiring supplied by external source.
Legend designation depicts component abbreviations. Number prefix located, if applicable, on schematic
e.
circuit, refers to system thereon, E.G. = 1-FHP2 refers to high pressure cutout no 2 on system no 1.
f. ylaa
g. Customer voltage free contacts connected to terminal 13 must be rated at 30V 5ma.
No controls {relays etc.} Should be mounted in any section of the control panel. Additionally, control wiring
h. not connected to the YORK control panel should not be run through the panel. If these precautions are not
followed, electrical noise could cause malfunctions or damage to the unit and its controls.
i. 120/14.3 -(Signal Input) i.e. 120 is wire # and 14.3 refers to sht. 14 column 3
NOTES
Refer to installation commissioning operation and maintenance manual for customer connections and
1
customer connection notes, non compliance to these instructions will invalidate unit warranty.
Wiring and components for compressor 3 only fitted when unit has 3 compressors on the system. 1-BMP3
2 is replaced by a link across terminals 134 and 135. 2-BMP3 is replaced by a link across terminals 234 and
235.
3
4 Fitted on units with hot gas bypass option.
5 EMS option is wired as shown.
6 This wiring must be used for old display 031-0110-000.
7 Network connection point.
8 Printer port.
9 Remote emergency stop can be wired between terminal l and 5 after removing link.
10 Power factor correction accessory. Power factor correction fitted to each compressor contactor.
Not fitted on compressors with internal motor protection. For system 1 terminals 132 and 133, 133 and
11 134 and 134 and 135 are linked. For system 2 terminals 232 and 233, 233 and 234 and 234 and 235 are
linked.
12 Only fitted on systems with 3 or 4 fans.
13 Only fitted on systems with 4 fans.
14 Only fitted on systems with 5 fans.
15 Only fitted on systems with 6 fans.
16 Input switch disconnect (standard on CE units) or circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
17 Input switch disconnect and individual system circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
115V control circuit requires a 115V supply unless control circuit transformer -T2 and -F3 are fitted
18
(standard on CE units).
For optional hydro kit. Heater -EPH is fitted and wired as shown. On single pump -KP1, -QMMSP1 and
19 -MP1 are fitted and wired as shown. On two pump hydro kits -KP2, -QMMSP2 and -MP2 are also fitted
and wired as shown.
20 Current measurement option wired as show.
21 Only fitted on systems with single speed fans.
22 Only fitted on systems with two speed fans.

035-21966-101 REVG
50 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Electrical notes and legend (cont’d)

23 Optional compressor manual motors starters (standard on CE units).

24 See sheet 3 of connection diagram for power input options.
25 Alternate connections shown for different two speed motor types.
26 Only fitted on systems with a maximum of 4 fans.
27 220/230V units require a separate fuse for units w/4 or more fans beforesystem.
28 Low ambient kit -FSC for fan -MF1 is only fitted on systems with less than 4 fans.
29
30
31 Input dual point circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
32 Field installed on remote evaporator units.
33 Fitted on units with single phase motors only
34 Fitted on units with low ambient option only
35 Only fitted on units with an acoustic kit
36 Only fitted on heat recovery units
37 Only fitted on condensing units
38 Omitted on condensing units

035-21966-101 REVG
5

JOHNSON CONTROLS 51
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Wiring diagrams
YCUL0020-YCUL0035 Low sound
YCUL0031-0035 Ultra low sound (460 V and 380-415 V 50 Hz)
035-21472-401 REV -

Figure 12 - Control Wiring Diagram, Single Circuit, IPU II

52 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 53
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0031-0035 Ultra low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, and 575 V)

035-21585-401 REV -

Figure 13 - Control Wiring Diagram, Single Circuit, IPU II

54 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 55
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0045-YCUL0055 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound (460 V and 380-415 V 50 Hz)
035-21447-401 REV -

Figure 14 - Control Wiring Diagram, Dual Circuit, IPU II

56 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 57
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0065-YCUL0072 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V and 575 V)
035-21586-401 REV -

Figure 15 - Control Wiring Diagram, Dual Circuit, IPU II

58 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 59
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0020-YCUL0035 Low sound

YCUL0031-0035 Ultra low sound
035-20964-103 REV C

Notes:
1.Field wiring to be in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code as well as all other applicable codes and speci-
fications.
2.Contacts must be suitable for switching 24 VDC, (gold contacts recommended). Wiring must not be run in the same conduit with any
line voltage (class 1) wiring.
3.To cycle unit ON and OFF automatically with contact shown, install a cycling device in series with the flow switch. See note 2 for con-
tact rating and wiring specifications.
4.To stop unit (emergency stop) with contacts other than those shown, install the stop contact between terminals 5 and 1. If a stop device
is not installed, a jumbeforemust be connected between terminals 5 and 1. Device must have a minimum contact rating of 6A at 115
VAC.
5.Contacts are rated at 115 V, 100 VA, resistive load only, and must be suppressed at load by user.
6.See installation, operation and maintenance manual when optional equipment is used.
7.Optional current readout. 5 V = 200 A.
8.1MP thru 6MP are contained in their respective compressor junction boxes.

Figure 16 - Control Wiring Diagram, Details, Single Circuit

60 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 61
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0045-YCUL0072 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound
035-20880-103 REV C

Notes:
1.Field wiring to be in accordance with the current edition of the National Electrical Code as well as all other applicable codes and speci-
fications.
2.Contacts must be suitable for switching 24 VDC, (gold contacts recommended). Wiring must not be run in the same conduit with any
line voltage (class 1) wiring.
3.To cycle unit on and off automatically with contact shown, install a cycling device in series with the flow switch. See note 2 for contact
rating and wiring specifications.
4.To stop unit (emergency stop) with contacts other than those shown, install the stop contact between terminals 5 and 1. If a stop device
is not installed, a jumbeforemust be connected between terminals 5 and 1. Device must have a minimum contact rating of 6 A at 115
VAC.
5.Contacts are rated at 115 V, 100 VA, resistive load only, and must be suppressed at load by user.
6.See installation, operation and maintenance manual when optional equipment is used.
7.Optional current readout. 5 V = 200 A.
8.1MP thru 6MP are contained in their respective compressor junction boxes.

Figure 17 - Control Wiring Diagram, Details, Dual Circuit

62 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 63
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Power options connection diagrams

YCUL0020-YCUL0024 Low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, 460 V, and 575 V)
035-21487-102 REV A

Figure 18 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit

64 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 65
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Power options connection diagrams

YCUL0020-YCUL0024 Low sound (380-415 V/3/50)
035-21487-105 REV -

Figure 19 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit

66 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 67
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0031-YCUL0035 Low sound

YCUL0031-YCUL0035 Ultra low sound (460 V and 380-415 V/3/50)
035-21472-102 REV B

Figure 20 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit

68 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 69
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0031-YCUL0035 Ultra low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, and 575 V)

035-21585-102 REV -

Figure 21 - Power Wiring, Single Circuit

70 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 71
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0045-YCUL0055 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound (460 V and 380-415 V 50 Hz)
035-21447-102 REV A

Figure 22 - Power Wiring, Dual Circuit

72 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 73
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0065-YCUL0072 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, and 575 V)

035-21025-102 REV B

Figure 23 - Power Wiring, Dual Circuit

74 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 75
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0020-YCUL0024 Low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, 460 V, and 575 V)

035-21487-404 REV -

Figure 24 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit

76 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 77
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0020-YCUL0024 Low sound (380-415 V/3/50)

035-21487-406 REV -

Figure 25 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit

78 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 79
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0031-YCUL0035 Low sound

YCUL0031-YCUL0035 Ultra low sound (460 V and 380-415 V/3/50)
035-21472-404 REV -

Figure 26 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit

80 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 81
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0031-YCUL0035 Ultra low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, and 575 V)

035-21585-404 REV -

Figure 27 - Connection Wiring, Single Circuit

82 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 83
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0045-YCUL0055 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound (460 V and 380-415 V 50 Hz)
035-21447-404 REV -

Figure 28 - Connection Wiring, Dual Circuit

84 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 85
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YCUL0065-YCUL0072 Low sound

YCUL0045-0072 Ultra low sound (200 V, 230 V, 380 V, and 575 V)
035-21586-404 REV -

Figure 29 - Connection Wiring, Dual Circuit

86 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

JOHNSON CONTROLS 87
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Dimensions (English)
Dimensions – YCUL0020 to 0072 (ENGLISH)

All dimensions in English unless otherwise noted

Note:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Controls unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit
is no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6 ft; rear to wall – 6 ft; control panel to end wall
– 4 ft 0 in.; top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10 ft. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the
unit.

88 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Dimensions – YCUL0020 to 0072 (ENGLISH)

60 HZ MODEL 0020EE 0024EE 0031EE 0035EE 0045EE 0051EE 0055EE 0065EE 0072EE
Length L 109.79 109.79 118.6 118.6 144.8 144.8 144.8 144.8 153.6
Width W 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 90.6 90.6 90.6 90.6 90.6
Height H 46.06 46.06 46.06 50 47.8 47.8 62.6 62.6 62.6
F
P 12.7 12.7 12.7 16.7 13.6 13.6 28.5 28.5 28.5
Suction In 1 1.6 1.6 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.3
Connection Suction In 2
Sizes Liquid Out
0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
1/2
System 1 Suction In 37.7 37.7 6.2 3.9 48.7 48.7 52.7 44.4 53.7
Dimensions Liquid Out 31.7 31.7 23.1 34.6 72.9 72.9 85.1 85.1 77.6
System 2 Suction In 41.6 41.6 35.1 35.1 33.3
Dimensions Liquid Out 17.3 17.3 14.1 14.1 15
D1 30.4 30.4 28.9 19.8 19.6 19.7 24 9.7 6.8
D2 6.0 6.0 6.5 5.8 6.4 6.4 9.1 9.1 5.3
D3 13.8 13.8 9.2 5
D4
I1 17 17 17 17 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8
I2 104.2 104.2 113.3 113.3 135 135 135 135 143.8
I3
I4
Isolator
I5
Location
I6
Dimensions
I7
I8
A 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
B 43.3 43.3 43.3 43.3 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5
R1 15.6 15.6 15.6 15.6 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1
Rigging
R2 97.1 97.1 105.1 105.1 130.9 130.9 130.9 130.8 137.6
Hole
R3
Locations
R4
X 58.6 58.5 63.1 67.1 59.6 59.2 61.9 61.5 59.7
Unit COG
Y 22.9 22.9 22.9 23.1 43.6 43.5 42.2 42.2 44.9

JOHNSON CONTROLS 89
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Dimensions – YCUL0020 to 0072 (SI)

All dimensions in English unless otherwise noted

Note:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions (including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation ensures rated performance, reliable
operation, and ease of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in unpredictable airflow
patterns and possible diminished performance. Johnson Controls unit controls will optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure safety
cutouts; however, the system designer must consider potential performance degradation. Access to the unit control center assumes the unit
is no higher than on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances: Side to wall – 6 ft; rear to wall – 6 ft; control panel to end wall
– 4 ft 0 in.; top – no obstructions allowed; distance between adjacent units – 10 ft. No more than one adjacent wall may be higher than the
unit.

90 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Dimensions – YCUL0020 to 0072 (SI)

50 HZ MODEL 0020EE 0024EE 0031EE 0035EE 0045EE 0051EE 0055EE 0065EE 0072EE
Length L 2788.7 2788.7 3012.4 3012.4 3677.9 3677.9 3677.9 3677.9 3901.4
Width W 1135.4 1135.4 1135.4 1135.4 2301.2 2301.2 2301.2 2301.2 2301.2
Height H 1169.9 1169.9 1270.0 1270.0 1214.1 1214.1 1590.0 1590.0 1590.0
F
P 322.6 322.6 424.2 424.2 345.4 345.4 723.9 723.9 723.9
Suction In 1 40.6 40.6 53.3 53.3 53.3 53.3 53.3 53.3 58.4
Connection
Suction In 2 53.3
Sizes
Liquid Out 1 / 2 22.9 22.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9
System 1 Suction In 957.6 957.6 157.5 99.1 1237.0 1237.0 1338.6 1127.8 1364.0
Dimensions Liquid Out 805.2 805.2 586.7 878.8 1851.7 1851.7 2161.5 2161.5 1971.0
System 2 Suction In 1056.6 1056.6 891.5 891.5 845.8
Dimensions Liquid Out 439.4 439.4 358.1 358.1 381.0
D1 772.2 772.2 734.1 503 497.8 500.4 609..6 246.4 172.7
D2 152.4 152.4 165.1 147.3 162.6 162.6 231.1 231.1 134.6
D3 350.5 350.5 233.7
D4 5
I1 431.8 431.8 431.8 431.8 248.9 248.9 248.9 248.9 248.9
I2 2646.7 2646.7 2877.8 2877.8 3429.0 3429.0 3429.0 3429.0 3652.5
I3
I4
Isolator
I5
Location
I6
Dimensions
I7
I8
A 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9
B 1099.8 1099.8 1099.8 1099.8 2273.2 2273.2 2273.2 2273.2 2273.2
R1 396.2 396.2 396.2 396.2 383.5 383.5 383.5 383.5 383.5
Rigging
R2 2466.6 2466.6 2669.5 2669.5 3324.9 3324.9 3324.9 3322.3 3495.0
Hole
R3
Locations
R4
X 1488.4 1485.9 1602.7 1704.3 1513.8 1503.7 1572.3 1562.1 1516.4
Unit COG
Y 581.7 581.7 581.7 586.7 1107.4 1104.9 1071.9 1071.9 1140.5

JOHNSON CONTROLS 91
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Clearances

(2 m)

(1.3 m) (2 m)
(2 m)

LD13243

Notes:
1. No obstructions allowed above the unit.
2. Only one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.
3. Adjacent units should be 10 ft (3 m) apart.

Figure 30 - Unit Clearances – All Models

92 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Weight distribution and isolator mounting positions

General
Weights of specific chiller models vary significantly as Whenever the isolator option is ordered, the isolators
options are added. As a result, total weights, weights at will be shipped loose with the chiller. Packed with
individual isolator positions, and actual isolator selec- the isolators and also in the control panel informa-
tion at each position cannot be published due to the tion packet is a drawing and table specifically for each
vast number of possible combinations. This informa- chiller, based on the option selection. The drawing and
tion will be available when the specific chiller/ option table will be similar to the sample shown below. The
selection is made from the local Johnson Controls sales drawing will show the isolator locations along with the
office. Be aware, weights will change with each op- weight in pounds and kilograms at the specific loca-
tion along with possible isolator changes. Weights and tion, isolator position, and location measurements for
isolators may need to be recalculated when the option each isolator.
selections are changed.

Order No: 082533060301 Unit shipping kg lb

Line No: 1 weight
Product: YCUL (Display on unit
1334.5 2942
5
Model: YCUL0045EE46XEA data nameplate)
Voltage: 46
L1 L2
Control Panel

0
R1 R2
0 Y

Top View
X
LD13276

X distance, Y distance,
Operating weight,
Location in. (mm) in. (mm) Vendor number
lb (kg)

R1 9.8 (248.9) 1.1 (27.9) ND-D / Yellow 1312 (595.1)

L1 9.8 (248.9) 89.5 (2273.2) ND-DS / Yellow 1843 (836.0)
R2 135 (3429) 1.1 (27.9) ND-D / Yellow 1280 (580.6)
L2 135 (3429) 89.5 (2273.2) ND-DS / Yellow 1793 (813.3)

SAMPLE PRINTOUT SUPPLIED IN THE ISOLATOR PACKAGE AND IN THE CHILLER PANEL LITERATURE PACKET.

Figure 31 - Sample Isolator Location Drawing

JOHNSON CONTROLS 93
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Isolator locations (English)

60 Hz model YCUL0020EE YCUL0024EE YCUL0031EE YCUL0035EE

I1 17 17 17 17
Isolator location I2 104.2 104.2 113.3 113.3
dimensions A 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
B 43.3 43.3 43.3 43.3

Figure 32 - Isolator Locations, 60 Hz

94 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Isolator locations (SI)

50 Hz model YCUL0020EE 3YCUL0024EE YCUL0031EE YCUL0035EE

I1 431.8 431.8 431.8 431.8
Isolator location I2 2646.7 2646.7 2877.8 2877.8
dimensions A 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9
B 1099.8 1099.8 1099.8 1099.8

Figure 33 - Isolator Locations, 50 Hz

JOHNSON CONTROLS 95
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Isolation information
One inch deflection spring isolator cross-reference

5/8"

Ø1/2"

H"

C"
T"
B" L"
D"
W" LD13759A

MOUNT DIMENSION DATA (IN.)

TYPE W D L B C T H
CP1 3 5/8 7-3/4 6-1/2 4-3/4 1/2 5-5/8
CP2 3 5/8 10-1/2 9-1/4 7-3/4 9/16 6

MODEL NUMBER RATED CAPACITY (LB) DEFLECTION RATED (IN.) COLOR CODE
CP1-1D-85 85 1.360 LT. PURPLE
CP1-1D-120 120 1.200 DK. YELLOW
CP1-1D-175 175 1.170 DK. BLUE
CP1-1D-250 250 1.400 YELLOW
CP1-1D-340 340 1.130 RED
CP1-1D-510 510 1.020 BLACK
CP1-1D-675 675 1.320 DK. PURPLE
CP1-1D-900 900 1.020 DK. GREEN
CP1-1D-1200 1200 0.900 GRAY
CP1-1D-1360 1360 0.770 WHITE
CP1-1D-1785N 1785 0.880 GRAY/RED

MODEL NUMBER RATED CAPACITY (LB) DEFLECTION RATED (IN.) COLOR CODE
CP2-1D-1020 1020 1.020 BLACK
CP2-1D-1350 1350 1.320 dk. PURPLE
CP2-1D-1800 1800 1.020 dk. GREEN
CP2-1D-2400 2400 0.900 GRAY
CP2-1D-2720 2720 0.770 WHITE
CP2-1D-3570N 3570 0.880 GRAY / RED

Figure 34 - One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross-Reference

96 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

One inch deflection spring isolators installation instructions

1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin- 5. Place equipment on top of isolators making sure
ning installation. that mounting holes of the equipment line up with
isolator positioning pin (“H”).
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw- 6. The adjustment process can only begin after the
ings or as otherwise recommended. equipment or machine is at its full operating
weight.
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad or sub-
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match 7. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group adjusting bolt (“D”) one full counterclockwise
recommends that the isolator base (“B”) be in- turn at a time. Repeat this procedure on all isola-
stalled on a level surface. Shim or grout as re- tors, one at a time.
quired, leveling all isolator bases to the same
8. Continue adjusting each isolator until a minimum
elevation (1/4 in. maximum difference can be tol-
of 1/4 in. clearance is achieved between the lower
erated).
housing and upbeforehousing. See the following
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure figure.
utilizing base slotted holes (C).
9. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
10. Installation is complete. 5

LD13790

Figure 35 - One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions

JOHNSON CONTROLS 97
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Two inch deflection seismic isolator cross-reference

5" 1-1/8"

5/8" 2-3/4"
2-3/4"
12"

3/8" GAP
5/8-11UNC
Ø3/4" TYP. (4)
TYP.(4)

3/4"
7/8"

1/2" LIMIT
STOP &
NUT 8-3/8"
OPER.
HEIGHT
12-1/4"
14"

3-1/2"
3/8"

5"
LD13761A
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, INTERPRET PER ANSI Y14.
MODEL Y2RSI-2DFINISH:
2. STANDARD SEISMICALLY RESTRAINED
HOUSING-POWDER VIBRATIONSPRING-POWDER
COATED (COLOR:BLACK), ISOLATOR FOR 2 IN.
COATED DEFLECTION
(COLOR: SEE T
HARDWARE ZINC-ELECTROPLATE.
3. EQUIPMENT RATED
MUST BE BOLTED OR WELDEDSPRING SOLID
TO THE TOP PLATE TO MEET ALLOWABLE SEISMIC RATINGS. ALLOWABLE
SEISMIC MOUNT RATED
DEFLECTION
4. ALL SPRINGS ARE DESIGNED RATE (LB/
FOR 50% OVERLOAD CAPACITYLOAD
WITH EXCEPTIONCOLOR CODE & 2D-2870G RATING
OF THE 2D-3280N
SIZE 5. REFER
LOAD (LB)PAGE FOR INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
TO NEXT (IN.) IN.) (LB) HORIZONTAL
6. CONSULT FACTORY FOR CONCRETE INSTALLATION.
Y2RSI-2D-150 150 2.4 62 234 WHITE 34.7
Y2RSI-2D-320 320 2.3 140 490 YELLOW 16.3
Y2RSI-2D-460 460 2.3 200 688 GREEN 11.3
Y2RSI-2D-710 710 2.2 330 1072 DK BROWN 7.3
Y2RSI-2D-870 870 1.9 460 1312 RED 6
Y2RSI-2D-1200N 1200 1.9 638 1818 RED/BLACK 4.3
Y2RSI-2D-1450 1450 1.8 900 2450 TAN 3.6
Y2RSI-2D-1690 1690 1.7 1140 2892 PINK 3.1
Y2RSI-2D-2000N 2000 1.7 1318 3342 PINK/BLACK 2.6
Y2RSI-2D-2640N 2640 1.5 1854 4283 PINK/GRAY 2
Y2RSI-2D-2870N 3080 1.5 2004 4629 PINK/GRAY/ORANGE 1.7
Y2RSI-2D-3280N 3740 1.8 2134 4930 PINK/GRAY/DK BROWN 1.4

Notes:
1. All dimensions are in inches, interpret beforeANSI Y14.
2. Standard finish: housing-powder coated (color, black), spring-powder coated (color, see table) hardware - zinc-electroplate.
3. Equipment must be bolted or welded to the top plate to meet allowable seismic ratings.
4. All springs are designed for 50% overload capacity with exception of the 2D-3280N and 2D-2870.
5. See next page for installation instructions.
6. Consult factory for concrete installation.

Figure 36 - Two Inch Deflection Seismic Isolator Cross-Reference

98 JOHNSON CONTROLS
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Seismic isolator installation and adjustment

1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin- isolator with a minimum of 3/8 fillet welds 2 in.
ning installation. long at 3 in. on center for a minimum total weld
of 10 in. (All sides of equipment or bracket resting
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be
on top plate (“A”) must be welded).
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw-
ings or as otherwise recommended. 7. The adjustment process can only begin after the
equipment or machine is at its full operating
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or sub-
weight.
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group 8. Back off each of the four limit stop lock nuts (“F”)
recommends that the isolator base plates (“B”) on isolators 1/2 in.
be installed on a level surface. Shim or grout as
9. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
required, leveling all isolator base plates to the
adjusting nuts (“G”) one full clockwise turn at a
same elevation (1/4-in. maximum difference can
time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators, one
be tolerated).
at a time. Check the limit stop lock nuts (“F”)
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure periodically to ensure that clearance between the
utilizing base plate thru holes (“C”) or weld base washer and rubber grommet is maintained. Stop
plate to supporting structure with 3/8 fillet weld 2 adjustment of isolator only when the top plate
in. long at 4 in. on center around entire base plate (“A”) has risen just above the shim (“E”). 5
or as engineered for specific load and or field con-
10. Remove all spacer shims (“E”).
ditions.
11. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
5. Isolators are shipped to the job site with two re-
movable spacer shims (“E”) between the top plate 12. Adjust all limit stop lock nuts (“F”) beforeisola-
and the housing. These shims must be in place tor, maintaining 1/4 in. to 3/8 in. gap. The limit
when the equipment is positioned over the isola- stop nuts must be kept at this gap to ensure uni-
tors. form bolt loading during uplift (as the case when
equipment is drained).
6. With all shims (“E”) in place, position equipment
on top of plate (“A”) of isolator. Bolt equipment 13. Installation is complete.
securely to top plate of isolator using a minimum
of two 5/8 UNC A325 grade 5 SAE bolts or weld
equipment or bracket to the top plate (“A”) of

("A") ("E") CL ("G") ("E") ("A") CL

GROMMET

1/4 - 3/8 GAP EQUIPMENT

("F")
WASHER ("E")
("F")

("C")
("C")
("B")

LD13763B

Figure 37 - Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment

JOHNSON CONTROLS 99
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Durulene isolator cross-reference

RD-Style
Isolators

DW

CD
Notes:
1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted beforeANSI Y14.
MOLDED
DURULENE 2. See next page for installation instructions.
3. Mount molded in weather resistant duralene compound as
HF ø AD THRU standard. Also available in other materials such as natural rubber,
TYP 2 PLACES extreme high temperature silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile
and EDPM.
4. AL = Mounting hole center to center spacing.
5. HF = Free height of mount, before loading. Operating height
calculated by the free height less the static deflection under load.
BT
All dimensions for reference only.
AL 6. Hardware is zinc-electroplated.
W
L

Notes:
1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted per ANSI Y14. DIMENSION DATA (in.)
MOUNT
2. Refer to next page for installation instructions.
3. Mount TYPE L
molded in weather resistant duralene W HF Also available
compound as standard. ALin other materials
AD BT CD DW
such as natural rubber, extreme high temperature silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile and EDPM.
4. AL RD1-WR
= Mounting hole center3.13
to center spacing.1.75 1.25 2.38 0.34 0.19 5/16-18 UNC X 3/4 1.25
5. HF = Free height of mount, prior to loading. Operating height calculated by the free height less the
static RD2-WR
deflection under load.3.88
All dimensions for2.38
reference only. 1.75 3.00 0.34 0.22 3/8-16 UNC X 1 1.75
6. Hardware zinc-electroplated.
RD3-WR 5.50 3.38 2.88 4.13 0.56 0.25 1/2-13 UNC X 1 2.50
RD4-WR 6.25 4.63 2.75 5.00 0.56 0.38 1/2-13 UNC X 1 3.00

RATED RATED RATED RATED

DURO DURO
MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY DEFLECTION MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY DEFLECTION
(± 5) (± 5)
[LB] [IN.] [LB] [IN.]
RD2-Light Blue-WR 35 0.4 30 RD3-Brown-WR 250 0.5 40
RD2-Brown-WR 45 0.4 40 RD3-Brick Red-WR 525 0.5 50
RD2-Brick Red-WR 70 0.4 50 RD3-Lime-WR 750 0.5 60
RD 2-Lime-WR 120 0.4 60 RD3-Charcoal-WR 1100 0.5 70

RATED RATED RATED RATED

DURO DURO
MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY DEFLECTION MODEL NUMBER CAPACITY DEFLECTION
(± 5) (± 5)
[LB] [IN.] [LB] [IN.]
RD2-Light Blue-WR 135 0.5 30 RD4-Brown-WR 1500 0.5 40
RD2-Brown-WR 170 0.5 40 RD4-Brick Red-WR 2250 0.5 50
RD2-Brick Red-WR 240 0.5 50 RD4-Lime-WR 3000 0.5 60
RD 2-Lime-WR 380 0.5 60 RD4-Charcoal-WR 4000 0.5 70
RD2 Charcoal-WR 550 0.5 70

Figure 38 - Durulene Isolator Cross-Reference

100 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 5 – Technical data
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Installation of durulene vibration isolators

1. Read instructions in their entirety before begin- 4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure
ning installation. utilizing base through holes (“B”).
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be 5. Remove top bolt and top washer. Place equip-
positioned in accordance with the submitial draw- ment on top of isolators so that mounting holes
ings or as otherwise recommended. in equipment or base line up with threaded hole
(“C”).
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or sub-
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match 6. Reinstall top bolt and washer and tighten down.
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group
7. Installation is complete.
recommends that the isolator base (“A”) be in-
stalled on a level surface. Shim or grout as re-
quired, leveling all isolator bases to the same
elevation (1/32-in. maximum difference can be
tolerated).

TOP BOLT
("B")
TOP WASHER

D D

("C")
("B")

CL CL ("A")
SECTION D-D
LD13762B

Figure 39 - Installation of Durulene Vibration Isolators

JOHNSON CONTROLS 101

 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

102 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 6 – Commissioning

Commissioning of this unit should only Compressor oil

be carried out by Johnson Controls Au- To add oil to a circuit:
thorized personnel.
1. Connect a YORK hand oil pump (Part No. 470-
10654-000) to the 1/4 in. oil charging valve with
a length of clean hose or copbeforeline, but do not
Commissioning personnel should be thoroughly famil- tighten the flare nut.
iar with the information contained in this literature, in 2. Using clean oil of the correct type (“V” oil), pump
addition to this section. oil until all air has been purged from the hose,
Commissioning should be performed using the de- then tighten the nut.
tailed checks outlined in the Equipment Pre-Startup 3. Stroke the oil pump to add oil to the oil system.
and Startup Checklist on page 105. The oil level should be between the bottom and
middle of the sight glass.
Preparation – power off
4. Check oil levels after operating the system at full
The following basic checks should be made with the load.
customer power to the unit switched OFF.
5. Turn OFF the system and check the level.
Inspection High oil concentration in the system
Inspect unit for installation damage. If found, take ac- may cause nuisance trips resulting from
tion and/or repair as appropriate. incorrect readings on the level sensor
and temperature sensors. Temperature 6
Refrigerant charge sensor errors may result in poor liquid
Check that pressure is present in both systems and that control and resultant liquid overfeed and
no leaks are apparent. If no pressure is present, a leak subsequent damage to the compressor.
test must be undertaken, the leak(s) located and re- Fans
paired. Condensing units are supplied with a nitrogen
or refrigerant holding charge (see tag on unit). These Check that all fans are free to rotate and are not dam-
systems must be evacuated with a suitable vacuum aged. Ensure blades are at the same height when ro-
pump/recovery unit as appropriate to below 500 mi- tated. Ensure fan guards are securely fixed.
crons.
Isolation / Protection
Care must also be taken to liquid charge slowly to Verify all sources of electrical supply to the unit are
avoid excessive thermal stress at the charging point. taken from a single point of isolation. Check that the
Once the vacuum is broken, charge into the condenser maximum recommended fuse sizes given in SECTION
coils with the full operating charge to provide 12° F 5 – TECHNICAL DATA has not been exceeded.
-15° F subcooling.
Control panel
Service and oil line valves
Check the panel to see that it is free of foreign materi-
Open each compressor suction, economizer, and dis- als (wire, metal chips, etc.) and clean out if required.
charge service valve. If valves are of the back-seat
type, open them fully (counterclockwise) then close Power connections
one turn of the stem to ensure operating pressure is fed
Check that the customer power cables are connected cor-
to pressure transducers. Open the liquid line service
rectly to the terminal blocks or optional circuit breaker.
valve and oil return line ball valve fully in each system.
Ensure that power cable connections, within the panels
to the circuit breaker or terminal blocks, are tight.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 103

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 6 – Commissioning
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Grounding Switch settings

Verify that the unit’s protective ground terminal(s) are Ensure that the condensing unit OFF/ON UNIT switch
correctly connected to a suitable grounding point. En- at the bottom of the keypad is OFF. Place the optional
sure that all unit internal ground connections are tight. circuit breaker handle on the panel door to ON. The
customer’s disconnection devices can now be set to
Supply voltage ON.
Verify that the site voltage supply corresponds to the
Verify the control panel display is illuminated. Ensure
unit requirement and is within the limits given in the
the system switches under the SYSTEM SWITCHES
Technical Data Section.
key are in the OFF position.
Preparation – power on
Compressor heaters
Perform the commissioning using the
detailed checks outlined in the “Equip- Verify the compressor heaters are energized. If the am-
ment Pre-Startup and Startup Check bient temperature is above 96°F (36°C) the compressor
List” as the commissioning procedure is heaters must be on for at least 8 hours before start-up
carried out. to ensure all refrigerant liquid is driven out of the com-
pressor and the oil. If the ambient temperature is below
86°F (30°C), allow 24 hours.
Apply power to the unit. Turn on the option panel cir-
cuit breaker if supplied. Air flow switch
The machine is now live. Verify an air flow switch is correctly fitted in the cus-
tomer’s ductwork and wired into the control panel cor-
rectly using shielded cable.
The air flow switch should be connected to terminals
13 and 14 of CTB1 on the panel. See Figure 11 on page
39.

104 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 6 – Commissioning
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Equipment Pre-Startup and Startup Checklist

AIR-COOLED SCROLL
COMPRESSOR CONDENSING UNITS
STARTUP CHECKLIST Supersedes: 150.63-CL2 (1013) Form 150.63-CL2 (319)

EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP AND STARTUP CHECKLIST

CUSTOMER: ____________________________________ JOB NAME: ____________________________________

ADDRESS: _____________________________________ LOCATION: ____________________________________
PHONE: ________________________________________ CUSTOMER ORDER NO: _________________________
JCI TEL NO: _____________________ JCI ORDER NO: __________________ JCI CONTRACT NO: ______________

CHILLER MODEL NO: ____________________________ UNIT SERIAL NO: _______________________________

The work (as checked below) is in process and will be completed by: _____________ / ____________ / ___________
Month Day Year

The following work must be completed in accordance with installation instructions:

A. Pre-Startup 13. Verify that TXV bulbs are strapped onto the suction
lines at 4 or 8 o’clock positions or suction tempera-
Checking the System Prior To Initial Start (No Power)
ture sensors if EEVs are installed. ..........................
Unit Checks
1. Inspect the unit for shipping or installation dam- B. Compressor Heaters
age. ......................................................................... (Power on – 24 Hours Prior To Start) 6
2. Ensure that all refrigerant piping has been complet- Apply 120 VAC and verify its value be-
ed and is correctly designed. .................................. tween terminals 5 and 2 of TB1. The volt-
age should be 120 VAC plus or minus 10%.
3. Visually check for refrigerant piping leaks. .............. Power must be applied 24 hours prior to start-up.
4. Open suction line ball valve, discharge line ball Each heater should draw approximately 0.5-1 A. ........
valve, and liquid line valve for each system. ...........
C. Startup
5. The compressor oil level should be maintained so
that an oil level is visible or splashing in the sight Panel Checks
glass when fully loaded. At shutdown, the oil level (Power On – Both Unit Switch Off)
should be between the bottom and middle of the oil 1. Apply 3-phase power and verify its value. Voltage
equalizing sight glass. ............................................. imbalance should be no more than 2% of the aver-
6. Verify proper CFM of air across evaporator coil. age voltage. .............................................................
Verify air flow switch operation. ............................... 2. Apply 120 VAC and verify its value on the terminal
7. Check the control panel to ensure it is free of for- block in the Power Panel. Make the measurement
eign material (wires, metal chips, etc.). ................... between terminals 5 and 2 of TB1. The voltage
should be 120 VAC plus or minus 10%. ..................
8. Visually inspect wiring (power and control). Wiring
MUST meet N.E.C. and local codes. ...................... 3. Program/verify the cooling setpoints, program
setpoints, and unit options. Record the values in
9. Check tightness of power wiring inside the power
Table 11 (see sections on Setpoints and Unit Keys
panel on both sides of the motor contactors and
for programming instruction in Table 16 and 17). ....
overloads. ...............................................................
4. Put the unit into Service Mode (as described under
10. Check for proper size fuses in main and control cir-
the Control Service and Troubleshooting section)
cuits, and verify overload setting corresponds with
and cycle each condenser fan to ensure proper ro-
RLA and FLA values in electrical tables. .................
tation. .....................................................................
11. Ensure 120 VAC Control Power to TB1 has 15 amp
5. Prior to this step, turn system 2 OFF (if applicable –
minimum capacity. ...................................................
refer to Option 2 under “UNIT keys” in section 7 for
12. Be certain all temp sensors are installed correctly. . more information on system switches). Connect a
manifold gauge to system 1 suction and discharge
service valves. ........................................................
JOHNSON CONTROLS 1

JOHNSON CONTROLS 105

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 6 – Commissioning
Issue date: 4/30/2022

FORM 150.63-CL2
ISSUE DATE: 03/12/2019

TABLE 1 - SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
“ON” position. As each compressor cycles ON, en-
OPTIONS sure that the discharge pressure rises and the suc-
Display Language tion pressure decreases. If this does not occur, the
compressor being tested is operating in the reverse
Sys 1 Switch
direction and must be corrected. After verifying prop-
Sys 2 Switch
er compressor rotation, turn the Unit Switch to “OFF.”
Chilled Liquid
* Ambient Control The discharge air or suction pressure
Local/Remote Mode setpoint may need to be temporarily
Control Mode lowered to ensure all compressors cycle
Display Units “ON.”
* Lead/Lag Control
* Fan Control
This unit uses scroll compressors which
Manual Override
can only operate in one direction. Failure
Current Feedback
to observe this will lead to compressor
** Soft Start failure.
** Unit Type
** Refrigerant Type
** Expansion Valve Type 6. Turn system 1 “off” and system 2 “on” (refer to Op-
COOLING SETPOINTS tion 2 under “UNIT keys” in Section 7 for more in-
Cooling Setpoint formation on system switches). ...............................
Range Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
EMS-PWM Max. Setpoint “ON” position. As each compressor cycles “on”, en-
sure that the discharge pressure rises and the suc-
PROGRAM
tion pressure decreases. If this does not occur, the
Discharge Pressure Cutout
compressor being tested is operating in the reverse
Suct. Pressure Cutout direction and must be corrected. After verifying prop-
Low Amb. Temp. Cutout er compressor rotation, turn the Unit Switch to “OFF”.
Anti-Recycle Time
Fan Control On Pressure The chilled liquid setpoint may need to
Fan Differential Off Pressure
be temporarily lowered to ensure all com-
pressors cycle “ON”.
Total # of Compressors
* Number of Fans/System
* Unit/Sys Voltage
Unit ID
* Sys 1 Superheat Setpoint
* Sys 2 Superheat Setpoint

*Not on All Models

**Viewable Only

2 JOHNSON CONTROLS

106 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 6 – Commissioning
Issue date: 4/30/2022

FORM 150.63-CL2
ISSUE DATE: 03/12/2019

D. CHECKING SUPERHEAT AND SUBCOOLING When adjusting the expansion valve (TXV only), the
adjusting screw should be turned not more than one
The subcooling temperature of each system can
turn at a time, allowing sufficient time (approximately
be calculated by recording the temperature of the
15 minutes) between adjustments for the system and
liquid line at the outlet of the condenser and sub-
the thermal expansion valve to respond and stabilize.
tracting it from the liquid line saturation tempera-
Ensure that superheat is set at a minimum of 10°F
ture at the liquid stop valve (liquid line saturation
(5.56°C) with a single compressor running on each circuit.
temp. is converted from a temperature/pressure chart).
Example: 2. Record the suction temperature, suction pressure,
suction saturation temperature, and superheat of
Liquid line pressure = each system below: ................................................
202 PSIG converted to temp. _ 102°F
minus liquid line temp.______ - 84°F SYS 1 SYS 2
Suction Temp = _______ _______ °F
Subcooling = ____________ 18°F
Suction Pressure = _______ _______ PSIG
Saturation Temp = _______ _______ °F
The subcooling should be adjusted to 18°F at design condi-
tions. Superheat = _______ _______ °F
1. Record the liquid line pressure and its correspond-
E. LEAK CHECKING
ing temperature, liquid line temperature, and
subcooling below: .................................................... Leak check compressors, fittings, and piping to en-
SYS 1 SYS 2 sure no leaks. ..............................................................
6
Liq Line Press = _______ _______ PSIG If the unit is functioning satisfactorily during the ini-
Saturated Temp = _______ _______ °F tial operating period, no safeties trip and the com-
Liq Line Temp = _______ _______ °F pressors cycle to control water temperature to
setpoint, the chiller is ready to be placed into operation.
Subcooling = _______ _______ °F
Owner's operating personnel:
After the subcooling is verified, the suction superheat
should be checked. The superheat should be checked Name: ___________________________________________________
only after steady state operation of the condensing
unit has been established, the leaving water tempera- Phone Number: __________________________________________
ture has been pulled down to the required leaving wa-
Name: ___________________________________________________
ter temperature, and the unit is running in a fully loaded
condition. Correct superheat setting for a system is 10°F Phone Number: __________________________________________
to 15°F (5.56°C to 8.33°C) 18” (46 cm) from the cooler.
Name: ___________________________________________________
Superheat should typically be set for no less than
10°F with only a single compressor running on a Phone Number: __________________________________________
circuit. The superheat is calculated as the difference
between the actual temperature of the returned refrig-
erant gas in the suction line entering the compressor
and the temperature corresponding to the suction pres-
sure as shown in a standard pressure/temperature chart.
Example:
Suction Temp = 46°F
minus Suction Press
60 PSIG converted to Temp - 34°F
Superheat = 12°F

JOHNSON CONTROLS 107

5000 Renaissance Drive, New Freedom, Pennsylvania USA 17349 1-800-524-1330 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2019 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

108 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 7 – Unit controls

00065VIP

Introduction Microprocessor board

The YORK Millenium MicroComputer Control Cen- The Microprocessor Board is the controller and deci-
ter is a microprocessor based control system designed sion maker in the control panel. System inputs such
to provide the entire control for the liquid condensing as pressure transducers and temperature sensors are
unit. The control logic embedded in the microproces- connected directly to the Microprocessor Board. The
sor based control system will provide control for the Microprocessor Board circuitry multiplexes the ana-
suction pressure or discharge air temperature, as well log inputs, digitizes them, and scans them to keep a
as sequencing, system safeties, displaying status, and constant watch on the unit operating conditions. From
daily schedules. The MicroComputer Control Center this information, the Microprocessor then issues com-
consists of four basic components: mands to the Relay Outputs to control contactors, so-
lenoids, etc. for Temperature Control and to react to
1. Microprocessor Board safety conditions.
2. Transformer
7
Keypad commands are acted upon by the microboard
3. Display to change setpoints, cutouts, scheduling, operating re-
quirements, and to provide displays.
4. Keypad
The on-board power supply converts 24 VAC from the
The keypad allows programming and accessing set- 1T transformer to a +12 VDC and +5 VDC regulated
points, pressures, temperatures, cutouts, daily sched- supply located on the Microprocessor Board. This volt-
ule, options, and fault information. age is used to operate integrated circuitry on the board.
Remote cycling, demand limiting and chilled liquid The 40 character display and unit sensors are supplied
temperature reset can be accomplished by field sup- power from the microboard 5 VDC supply.
plied contacts. 24 VAC is rectified and filtered to provide unregulat-
Compressor starting and stopping and loading and un- ed +30 VDC to supply the flow switch, PWM remote
temperature reset, and demand limit circuitry which is
loading decisions are performed by the Microprocessor
available to be used with field supplied contacts. The
to maintain suction pressure or discharge air tempera-
Microprocessor Board energizes on-board relays to
ture. These decisions are a function of temperature de-
output 120 VAC to motor contactors, solenoid valves,
viation from setpoint.
etc. to control system operation. 120 VAC is supplied
A master ON/Off switch is available to activate or de- to the optimal T3 Transformer, which supplies 12 VAC
activate the unit. to the bridge diode module. The Bridge Diode Mod-
ule rectifies the voltage to -12 V unregulated The +12
V unregulated voltage supplies power to the Remote
Temperature Reset Circuit Board.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 109

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Unit switch Battery back-up

A unit ON/OFF switch is just underneath the keypad. The Microprocessor Board contains a Real Time Clock
This switch allows the operator to turn the entire unit integrated circuit chip with an internal battery backup.
OFF if desired. The switch must be placed in the ON The purpose of this battery backup is to ensure any
position for the unit to operate. programmed values (setpoints, clock, cutouts, etc.) are
not lost during a power failure regardless of the time
Display involved in a power cut or shutdown period.
The 40 Character Display (2 lines of 20 characters) is
Transformer
a liquid crystal display used for displaying system pa-
rameters and operator messages. A 40 VA, 120/24 VAC 50/60 Hz transformer is pro-
vided to supply power to the Microprocessor Board,
The display in conjunction with the keypad, allows the which in turn rectifies, filters, and regulates as neces-
operator to display system operating parameters as well sary to supply power to the display, sensors, and trans-
as access programmed information already in memory. ducers.
The display has a lighted background for night viewing
and for viewing in direct sunlight. Single system select and programming # of
When a key is pressed, such as the OBeforeDATA key, compressors
system parameters will be displayed and will remain The control software is common between single (1)
on the display until another key is pressed. The system and dual (2) system units. A jumbeforeis installed be-
parameters can be scrolled with the use of the ↑ (UP) tween terminals 13 and 17 on the user terminal block
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys. The display will update all to configure a unit for a single system. Dual (2) system
information at a rate of about 1 beforesecond. units do not have a jumbeforeinstalled. The jumbe-
foreis only checked by the microboard on power-up.
Display Messages may show characters indicating
“greater than” (>) or “less than” (<). These characters The total number of compressors is programmable un-
indicate the actual values are greater than or less than der the PROGRAM key. Single (1) system units can
the limit values which are being displayed. have 2 or 3 compressors. Dual (2) system units can
have 4, 5, or 6 compressors.
Keypad
The 12 button non-tactile keypad allows the user to
retrieve vitals system parameters such as system pres-
sures, temperatures, compressor running times and
starts, option information on the chiller, and system
setpoints. This data is useful for monitoring chiller op-
eration, diagnosing potential problems, troubleshoot-
ing, and commissioning the chiller.
It is essential the user become familiar with the use of the
keypad and display. This allows the user to make full use
of the capabilities and diagnostic features available.

110 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Status key

00066VIP

Unit status D A I L Y S C H E D U L E
Pressing the STATUS key will enable the operator to S H U T D O W N
determine current unit operating status. The messages
The DAILY SCHEDULE SHUTDOWN message in-
displayed will include running status, cooling demand,
dicates that the daily/holiday schedule programmed is
fault status, external cycling device status. The display
keeping the unit from running.
will be a single message relating to the highest prior-
ity message as determined by the microboard. Status F L O W S W I T C H / R E M S T O P
messages fall into the categories of General Status and N O R U N P E R M
Fault Status.
NO RUN PERM shows that either the flow switch is
The following General, Safety, and Warning messages open or a remote start/stop contact is open in series
are displayed when the STATUS key is pressed. Fol- with the flow switch. A 3-second delay is built into the
lowing each displayed message is an explanation per- software to prevent nuisance shutdowns due to errone-
taining to that particular message. ous signals on the run permissive input.
General status messages S Y S 1 S Y S S W I T C H O F F
S Y S 2 S Y S S W I T C H O F F
In the case of messages which apply to individual
systems, SYS 1 and SYS 2 messages will both be dis- SYS SWITCH OFF tells that the system switch under
played and may be different. In the case of single sys- OPTIONS is turned OFF. The system will not be al-
7
tem units, all SYS 2 messages are blank. lowed to run until the switch is turned back ON.
U N I T S W I T C H O F F S Y S 1 N O C O O L L O A D
S H U T D O W N S Y S 2 N O C O O L L O A D

This message informs the operator that the UNIT switch This message informs the operator that the discharge
on the control panel is in the OFF position which will air temperature is below the point (determined by the
not allow the unit to run. setpoint and control range) that the microboard will
bring on a system or that the microboard has not loaded
R E M O T E C O N T R O L L E D
the lead system far enough into the loading sequence
S H U T D O W N
to be ready to bring the lag system ON. The lag system
The REMOTE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN mes- will display this message until the loading sequence is
sage indicates that either an ISN system or RCC has ready for the lag system to start.
turned the unit “OFF”, not allowing it to run.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 111

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

S Y S 1 C O M P S R U N X occur when the discharge pressure gets within 15 psig

S Y S 2 C O M P S R U N X of the programmed discharge pressure cutout. This will
only happen if the system is fully loaded and will shut
The COMPS RUNNING message indicates that the only one compressor off. If the system is not fully load-
respective system is running due to demand. The “X” ed, discharge limiting will not go into effect. Reload-
will be replaced with the number of compressors in ing the affected system will occur when the discharge
that system that are running. pressure drops to 85% of the unload pressure and 10
minutes have elapsed.
S Y S 1 Z O N E T H E R M O F F
S Y S 2 Z O N E T H E R M O F F S Y S 1 S U C T L I M I T I N G
S Y S 2 S U C T L I M I T I N G
These messages indicate that the zone thermostats
for system 1 and system 2 are open. These messages When this message appears, suction pressure limit-
will only be displayed when the control mode is pro- ing is in effect. The suction pressure limit is a control
grammed for Suction Pressure. point that limits the loading of a system when the suc-
tion pressure drops to within 15% above the suction
S Y S 1 A R T I M E R X X S
pressure cutout. On a standard system programmed
S Y S 2 A R T I M E R X X S
for 80 psig (5.52 barg) suction pressure cutout, the mi-
croboard would inhibit loading of the affected system
The anti-recycle timer message shows the amount of with the suction pressure less than or equal to 1.15 x 80
time left on the respective systems anti-recycle timer. psig (5.52 barg) = 92 psig (6.34 barg).
This message is displayed when the system is unable to
start due the anti-recycle timer being active. The system will be allowed to load after 60 seconds
and after the suction pressure rises above the suction
S Y S 1 A C T I M E R X X S pressure load limit point.
S Y S 2 A C T I M E R X X S
S Y S 1 L O A D L I M I T X X %
S Y S 2 L O A D L I M I T X X %
The anti-coincidence timer is a software feature that
guards against two systems starting simultaneously.
This ensures instantaneous starting current does not be- This message indicates that load limiting is in effect
come excessively high due to simultaneous starts. The and the percentage of the limiting in effect. This limit-
microboard limits the time between compressor starts ing could be due to the load limit/PWM input, ISN or
to 1 minute regardless of demand or the anti-recycle RCC controller sending a load limit command.
timer being timed out. The anti-coincidence timer is
M A N U A L
only present on two system units. O V E R R I D E
S Y S 1 D S C H L I M I T I N G
S Y S 2 D S C H L I M I T I N G If MANUAL OVERRIDE mode is selected, the STA-
TUS display will show this message. This will indicate
When this message appears, discharge pressure limit- that the Daily Schedule is being ignored and the unit will
ing is in effect. The Discharge Pressure Limiting fea- start-up when chilled liquid temperature allows, Remote
ture is integral to the standard software control; howev- Contacts, UNIT switch and SYSTEM switches permit-
er the discharge transducer is optional on some models. ting. This is a priority message and cannot be overridden
It is important to keep in mind that this control does not by anti-recycle messages, fault messages, etc. when in
function unless the discharge transducer is installed in the STATUS display mode. Therefore, do not expect to
the system. see any other STATUS messages when in the MANU-
AL OVERRIDE mode. MANUAL OVERRIDE is only
The limiting pressure is a factory set limit to keep the to be used in emergencies or for servicing. Manual over-
system from faulting on the high discharge pressure ride mode automatically disables itself after 30 minutes.
cutout due to high load or pull down conditions. When
the unload point is reached, the microboard will auto-
matically unload the affected system by de energizing
one compressor. The discharge pressure unload will

112 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

S Y S 1 P U M P I N G D O W N The Suction Pressure Cutout is a software cutout that

S Y S 2 P U M P I N G D O W N helps protect the unit from a coil freeze-up or compres-
sor damage should the system attempt to run with a
low refrigerant charge or a restriction in the refrigerant
The PUMPING DOWN message indicates that a com-
circuit.
pressor in the respective system is presently in the pro-
cess of pumping the system down. When pumpdown is Repeated starts after resetting a low suc-
initiated on shutdown, the liquid line solenoid or EEV tion pressure fault will cause coil freeze-
will close and a compressor will continue to run. When up and compressor failure. Whenever a
the suction pressure decreases to the suction pressure system locks out on this safety, immediate
cutout setpoint or runs for 180 seconds, whichever steps should be taken to identify the cause.
comes first, the compressor will cycle OFF.
At system start, the cutout is set to 10% of programmed
Fault safety status messages value. During the next 3 minutes the cutout point is
Safety Status messages appear when safety thresholds ramped up to the programmed cutout point. If at any
in the unit have been exceeded. Safeties are divided time during these 3 minutes the suction pressure falls
into two categories – system safeties and unit safeties. below the ramped cutout point, the system will stop.
System safeties are faults that cause the individual sys- This cutout is completely ignored for the first 30 sec-
tem to be shut down. Unit safeties are faults that cause onds of system run time to avoid nuisance shutdowns,
all running compressors to be shut down. Following especially on units that utilize a low pressure switch in
are display messages and explanations. place of the suction pressure transducer.

System safeties After the first 3 minutes, if the suction pressure falls
below the programmed cutout setting, a “transient
System safeties are faults that cause individual systems protection routine” is activated. This sets the cutout at
to be shut down if a safety threshold is exceeded for 3 10% of the programmed value and ramps up the cutout
seconds. They are auto reset faults in that the system over the next 30 seconds. If at any time during these
will be allowed to restart automatically after the fault 30 seconds the suction pressure falls below the ramped
condition is no longer present. However, if 3 faults on cutout, the system will stop.
the same system occur within 90 minutes, that system
will be locked out on the last fault. This condition is S Y S 1 M P / H P C O F A U L T 7
then a manual reset. The system switch (under OP- S Y S 2 M P / H P C O F A U L T
TIONS key) must be turned OFF and then back ON
to clear the lockout fault. Fault messages will be dis- S Y S 1 M P / H P C O I N H I B
played whenever a system is locked out. S Y S 2 M P / H P C O I N H I B

S Y S 1 H I G H D S C H P R E S
S Y S 2 H I G H D S C H P R E S The Motor Protector/Mechanical High Pressure Cutout
protects the compressor motor from overheating or the
The Discharge Pressure Cutout is a software cutout in system from experiencing dangerously high discharge
the microprocessor and is backed-up by a mechanical pressure.
high pressure cutout switch located in the refrigerant This fault condition is present when CR1 (SYS 1) or
circuit. It ensures that the system pressure does not ex- CR2 (SYS 2) relays de-energize due to the HP switch or
ceed safe working limits. The system will shutdown motor protector opening. This causes the respective CR
when the programmable cutout is exceeded and will be contacts to open causing 0 VDC to be read on the inputs
allowed to restart when the discharge pressure falls 40 to the microboard. The fault condition is cleared when a
psig below the cutout. Discharge transducers must be 30 VDC signal is restored to the input.
installed for this function to operate.
The internal motor protector opens at 185°F to 248°F
S Y S 1 L O W S U C T P R E S S
(85°C to 120°C) and auto resets. The mechanical HP
S Y S 2 L O W S U C T P R E S S
switch opens at 585 psig plus or minus 10 psig (27.92
barg plus or minus 0.69 barg) and closes at 330 psig
plus or minus 25 psig (22.75 barg plus or minus 1.72
barg).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 113

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

The compressor is also equipped with a discharge Unit safeties

temperature sensor for the purpose of sensing inter- Unit safeties are faults that cause all running compres-
nal scroll temperature. This sensor protects the scrolls sors to be shut down. Unit faults are auto reset faults
from overheating due to inadequate cooling that may in that the unit will be allowed to restart automatically
occur when refrigerant charge is low, or superheat is after the fault condition is no longer present.
too high.
U N I T F A U L T :
When the sensor senses a high temperature, it opens L O W A M B I E N T T E M P
the motor protector circuit in the compressor causing
the compressor to shut down.
The Low Ambient Temp Cutout is a safety shutdown
During the first two faults an MP/HP INHIBIT message designed to protect the unit from operating in a low
will be displayed and the system will not be locked out. ambient condition. If the outdoor ambient temperature
Only after the third fault in 90 minutes will the MP/ falls below the programmable cutout, the unit will shut
HPCO FAULT message be displayed. down. Restart can occur when temperature rises 2°F
above the cutoff.
Whenever the motor protector or discharge sensor
shuts down a compressor and the system, the inter- U N I T F A U L T :
nal compressor contacts will open for a period of 30 1 1 5 V A C U N D E R V O L T A G E
minutes to ensure that the motor or scroll temperatures
have time to dissipate the heat and cool down. The Under Voltage Safety ensures that the system is
After 30 minutes, the contacts will close and the sys- not operated at voltages where malfunction of the mi-
tem will be permitted to restart. The microboard will croprocessor could result in system damage. When the
not try to restart the compressors in a system that shuts 115VAC to the micro panel drops below a certain level,
down on this safety for a period of 30 minutes to allow a unit fault is initiated to safely shut down the unit. Re-
the internal compressor to time out. start is allowed after the unit is fully powered again and
the anti-recycle timers have finished counting down.
During the 30 minute timeout, the MP/HPCO INHIB
message will be displayed. The MP/HPCO fault will U N I T F A U L T :
only be displayed after 3 shutdowns in 90 minutes, in- H I G H M T R C U R R
dicating the system is locked out and will not restart.
When the CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE BeforeUNIT
S Y S 1 H I G H M T R C U R R
option is selected under the OPTIONS key, the unit will
S Y S 2 H I G H M T R C U R R
shut down when the voltage exceeds the programmed
trip voltage for 5 seconds.
When the System Current Feedback option is installed
and selected (Option 11 under OPTIONS key Current The trip voltage is programmed at the factory accord-
Feedback), this safety will operate as follows. If the ing to compressor or unit RLA.
actual feedback voltage of the system proportional to Restart occurs after the anti-recycle timer times out.
currents exceeds the programmed trip voltage for 5
seconds, the system will shutdown.

114 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Unit warning If a low battery is detected, it should be replaced as

The following messages are not unit safeties and will soon as possible. The programmed values will all be
not be logged to the history buffer. They are unit warn- lost and the unit will be prevented from running on the
ings and will not auto-restart. Operator intervention is next power interruption. The RTC/battery (031-02565-
required to allow a restart of the unit. 000) is located at U5 on the IPU microboard (031-
02630-000).
! ! L O W B A T T E R Y ! !
I N C O R R E C T
C H E C K P R O G / S E T P / O P T N
U N I T T Y P E

The Low Battery Warning can only occur at unit pow-

er-up. On micro panel power-up, the RTC battery is This indicates the condensing unit jumbeforeis not in-
checked. If a low battery is found, all programmed stalled between J11-7 and J11-12, on the I/O Board.
setpoints, program values, options, time, schedule, and This jumbeforemust be installed to operate the con-
history buffers will be lost. These values will all be re- densing unit.
set to their default values which may not be the desired
operating values. Once a faulty battery is detected, the
unit will be prevented from running until the PRO-
GRAM key is pressed. Once PROGRAM is pressed
the anti-recycle timers will be set to the programmed
anti-recycle time to allow the operator time to check
setpoints, and if necessary, reprogram programmable
values and options.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 115

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Status key messages

Table 11 - Status Key Messages Quick Reference List

STATUS KEY MESSAGES

General Messages Fault Messages

Unit Switch Off System Safeties Unit Safeties Unit Warnings

Shutdown

Remote Controlled System X High Disch Pressure Low Ambient Temp Low Battery
Shutdown

Daily Schedule System X Low Suct Pressure 115VAC Undervoltage Incorrect Unit Type
Shutdown

*Air FlowSwitch/Rem
* Flow Switch/RemStop
Stop System X MP/HPCO Fault
No Run
No Run Permissive
Permissive Unit High Mtr Curr
(Optional)

System X Switch Off System X High Mtr Curr

(Optional)

System X
No Cooling load

System X Comps Run

** System X Zone
Thermostat Off

System X AR Timer

System X AC Timer

System X Disch Limiting

System X Suction Limiting

System X Percentage Load Limiting

Manual Overide Status

LD13346
System X Pumping Down (on shutdown)

* Only displayed when unit control mode programmed for Discharge Air Temperature.
** Only displayed when unit control mode programmed for Suction Pressure.

116 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Display/Print keys

00067VIP

The DISPLAY/PRINT keys allow the user to retrieve under the OBeforeDATA key in the order that they are
system and unit information that is useful for moni- displayed. The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through
toring unit operation, diagnosing potential problems, the displays in the order they appear below:
troubleshooting, and commissioning the unit. The unit MUST be set to be a condensing
System and unit information, unit options, setpoints, unit via jumbeforebetween J11-7 and J11-
and scheduling can also be printed out with the use of 12 on the I/O Board. DO NOT operate the
a printer. Both real-time and history information are unit if not correctly set up. 7
available.

ObeforeData key D I S C H A R G E A I R T E M P
The OBeforeDATA key gives the user access to unit = 5 7 . 4 ° F
and system operating parameters. When the OBe-
foreDATA key is pressed, system parameters will be This display shows the discharge air temperature leav-
displayed and remain on the display until another key ing the evaporator. The display will only be shown
is pressed. After pressing the OBeforeDATA key, the when the Control Mode is programmed for Discharge
various operating data screens can be scrolled through Air (under the OPTIONS key). The minimum limit on
by using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys or the the display for these parameters are 9.2°F (-12.7°C).
ENTER/ADV key located under the ENTRY section. The maximum limit on the display is 85.4°F (29.7°C).
System 2 information is only displayed for
A M B I E N T A I R T E M P
2 system units.
= 8 7 . 5 ° F

This display shows the ambient air temperature. The

minimum limit on the display is 0.4°F (-17.6°C). The
maximum limit on the display is 131.2°F (55.1°C).
With the UNIT TYPE set as a condensing unit (via jum-
beforebetween J11-7 and J11-12 on the I/O Board), the
following list of operating data screens are viewable

JOHNSON CONTROLS 117

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

S Y S X S P = 1 1 5 . 1 P S I G L O A D T I M E R 5 8 S E C
D P = 3 O 5 . 0 P S I G U N L O A D T I M E R 0 S E C

These displays show suction and discharge pressures This display of the load and unload timers indicate
for each system. The discharge pressure transducer is the time in seconds until the unit can load or unload.
optional on some models. Whether the systems loads or unloads is determined by
how far the actual liquid temperature is from setpoint.
If the optional discharge transducer is not installed, the A detailed description of unit loading and unloading is
discharge pressure would display 0 psig (0 barg).
covered under the topic of Capacity Control.
Some models come factory wired with a low pressure
L E A D S Y S T E M I S
switch in place of the suction transducer. In this case,
S Y S T E M N U M B E R 2
the suction pressure would only be displayed as the
maximum suction pressure reading of greater than 400
psig (27.6 barg) when closed, or less than 0 psig (0 This display indicates the current LEAD system. In
barg) when open. this example system 2 is the LEAD system, making
system 1 the LAG system. The LEAD system can be
The minimum limits for the display are: manually selected or automatic. See the programming
Suction Pressure: 0 psig (0 barg) under the Options Key on page 133. The Lead System
Discharge Pressure: 0 psig (0 barg) display will only appear on a two system unit.
The maximum limits for the display are: A unit utilizing hot gas bypass should be
Suction Pressure: 400 psig (27.6 barg) programmed for MANUAL with system
Discharge Pressure: 650 psig (44.8 barg) 1 as the lead system. Failure to do so
will prevent hot gas operation if system
S Y S X H O U R S 1 = X X X X X 2 switches to the lead system when pro-
2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X grammed for AUTOMATIC LEAD/LAG.

S Y S X S T A R T S 1 = X X X X X E V A P P U M P I S O N
2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X E V A P H E A T E R I S O F F

This display is for chiller applications only and does

The above two messages will appear sequentially for
not apply to condensing units. However, the evaporator
each system. The first display shows accumulated run-
contacts could be used to control the air handler.
ning hours of each compressor for the specific system.
The second message shows the number of starts for The evaporator pump dry contacts are energized
each compressor on each system. (closed) when any compressor is running, or the unit
Run times and starts will only be displayed is not OFF on the daily schedule and the unit switch is
for the actual number of systems and ON. However, even if one of above is true, the contacts
compressors on the unit. will not close if the micro panel has been powered up
for less than 30 seconds or if the contacts have been
closed in the last 30 seconds.

A total of 99,999 hours and starts can be logged before

the counter rolls over to 0.

118 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

A C T I V E R E M O T E C T R L S Y S X F A N S T A G E 3
N O N E

There are several types of remote systems that can be S Y S X A M P S = 3 6 . 0

used to control or monitor the unit. The following mes- V O L T S = 0 . 8
sages indicate the type of remote control mode active:
NONE – no remote control active. Remote moni- The preceding five messages will appear sequentially,
first for system 1, then for system 2.
toring may be via ISN.
ISN – YORK Talk via ISN allows remote load The first message indicates the system and the associ-
ated compressors which are running.
limiting and temperature reset through an ISN
system. The second message indicates the system run time in
days – hours – minutes – seconds. Note that this is not
*LOAD LIM – load limiting enabled. Can be ei-
accumulated run time but pertains only to the current
ther stage 1 or stage 2 of limiting.
system cycle.
*PWM TEMP – EMS-PWM temperature reset
The third message indicates the system, and whether
*Refer to the section on OPERATING CON- the liquid line solenoid or EEV pilot solenoid and hot
TROLS. gas solenoid are being turned ON by the microboard.
Note that hot gas is not available for system 2, so there
If the microboard is programmed for CURRENT is no message pertaining to the hot gas solenoid when
FEEDBACK ONE BeforeUNIT under the OPTIONS system 2 message is displayed.
key, the display will show up as the first display before
the SYS 1 displays. Total unit current is displayed as The fourth message indicates which stage of condenser
shown below: fan operation is active.

U N I T A M P S = 5 4 . 0 See the section on Condenser Fan Control in SECTION

V O L T S = 1 . 2 8 – UNIT OPERATION for more information.
The fifth message displays current as sensed by the op-
If the microboard is programmed for CURRENT tional current feedback circuitry. The display reads out
FEEDBACK NONE, no current display will appear.
7
in amps along with the DC feedback voltage from the
module. Current is calculated by:
S Y S X C O M P S T A T U S
1 = X X X 2 = X X X 3 = X X X 225 A x Actual Volts
5 Volts
S Y S X R U N T I M E
Individual displays will be present for each system,
X X - X X - X X - X X D - H - M - S
if CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE BeforeSYSTEM
is programmed under the OPTIONS key. Combined
S Y S X L L S V I S O N compressor current for each system is displayed.
H O T G A S S O L I S O F F

JOHNSON CONTROLS 119

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

ObeforeData quick reference list Print key

The following table is a quick reference list for infor- The PRINT key allows the operator to obtain a printout
mation available under the OBeforeDATA key. of real-time system operating data or a history printout
of system data at the “instant of the fault” on the last six
Table 12 - Operation Data
faults which occurred on the unit. An optional printer is
required for the printout.
Oper Data Key
Operating data printout
Pressing the PRINT key and then OBeforeDATA key
** Discharge Air Temperature allows the operator to obtain a printout of current sys-
tem operating parameters. When the OBeforeDATA
Ambient Air Temperature key is pressed, a snapshot will be taken of system op-
erating conditions and panel programming selections.
This data will be temporarily stored in memory and
System 1 Discharge & Suction Pressure transmission of this data will begin to the printer. A
sample Operating Data printout is shown below. (Note:
System 2 Discharge & Suction Pressure Not all values are printed for all models.)

*System X Accumulated Hours YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

MILLENNIUM CONDNESING UNIT

*System X Accumulated Starts UNIT STATUS

2:04PM 01 JULY 09

Load and Unload Timers SYS 1 NO COOLING LOAD

SYS 2 COMPRESSORS RUNNING 2

Temp Rate & Temp Error OPTIONS

AMBIENT CONTROL STANDARD
(Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Only) LOCAL/REMOTE MODE REMOTE
CONTROL MODE LEAVING LIQUID
LEAD/LAG CONTROL AUTOMATIC
Lead System Indicator FAN CONTROL AMB & DSCH PRESS
CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE
SOFT START ENABLED
Evaporator Pump Contacts EXPANSION VALVE THERMOSTATIC

PROGRAM VALUES
Active Remote Control DSCH PRESS CUTOUT 395 PSIG
SUCT PRESS CUTOUT 44 PSIG
LOW AMBIENT CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF
Current Feedback One Per Unit ANTI RECYCLE TIME 600 SECS
FAN CONTROL ON PRESS 240 PSIG
FAN DIFF OFF PRESS 80 PSIG
*System X Compressors Status NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS 6
NUMBER OF FANS BeforeSYSTEM
4
*System X Run Time UNIT TRIP VOLTS 3.0
REFRIGERANT TYPE R-410A
REMOTE UNIT ID PROGRAMMED 1
Sys X LLSV & HGSV Status
UNIT DATA
DISCHARGE AIR TEMP 67.0 DEGF
*System X Condenser Fan Stage COOLING RANGE 65.0 +/- 5.0 DEGF
AMBIENT AIR TEMP 74.8 DEGF
LEAD SYSTEM SYS 2
Current Feedback One Per System EVAPORATOR PUMP ON
LD13347 EVAPORATOR HEATER OFF
* Block of information repeats for each system ACTIVE REMOTE CONTROL NONE
UNIT XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
** Only displayed when Control Mode is programmed for Discharge SOFTWARE VERSION C.M08.14.02
Air Temperature Control.

120 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

History printout
SYSTEM 1 DATA Pressing the PRINT key and then the HISTORY key
COMP STATUS 1=OFF 2=OFF 3=OFF allows the operator to obtain a printout of information
RUN TIME 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
SUCTION PRESSURE 66 PSIG relating to the last 6 Safety Shutdowns which occurred.
DISCHARGE PRESSURE 219 PSIG The information is stored at the instant of the fault, re-
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF gardless of whether the fault caused a lockout to occur.
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID OFF
HOT GAS BYPASS VALVE OFF The information is also not affected by power failures
CONDENSER FAN STAGES OFF (long-term internal memory battery backup is built into
SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS the circuit board) or manual resetting of a fault lock-
SYSTEM 2 DATA out.
COMP STATUS 1=OFF, 2=OFF, 3=OFF
RUN TIME 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S When the HISTORY key is pressed, a printout is trans-
SUCTION PRESSURE 51 PSIG mitted of all system operating conditions which were
DISCHARGE PRESSURE 157 PSIG stored at the “instant the fault occurred” for each of the
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 44.3 DEGF
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON 6 Safety Shutdowns buffers. The printout will begin
CONDENSER FAN STAGE 3 with the most recent fault which occurred. The most
SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS recent fault will always be stored as Safety Shutdown
DAILY SCHEDULE No. 1. Identically formatted fault information will then
S M T W T F S *=HOLIDAY be printed for the remaining safety shutdowns.
MON START=00:00AM
STOP=00:00AM Information contained in the Safety Shutdown buffers
TUE START=00:00AM
STOP=00:00AM is very important when attempting to troubleshoot a
WED START=00:00AM system problem. This data reflects the system condi-
STOP=00:00AM tions at the instant the fault occurred and often reveals
THU START=00:00AM other system conditions which actually caused the
STOP=00:00AM
FRI START=00:00AM safety threshold to be exceeded.
STOP=00:00AM
SAT START=00:00AM The history printout is similar to the operational data
STOP=00:00AM printout shown in the previous section. The differences
HOL START=00:00AM
STOP=00:00AM are in the header and the schedule information. The
daily schedule is not printed in a history print. 7
See Service And Troubleshooting section One example history buffer printout is shown follow-
for Printer Installation information. ing. The data part of the printout will be exactly the
same as the operational data print so it is not repeated
here. The difference is that the Daily Schedule is not
printed in the history print and the header will be as
follows.

YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

MILLENNIUM CONDENSING UNIT

SAFETY SHUTDOWN NUMBER 1

SHUTDOWN @ 3:56PM 29 JULY 09

SYS 1 HIGH DSCH PRESS SHUTDOWN

SYS 2 NO FAULTS

JOHNSON CONTROLS 121

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

History displays L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E
The HISTORY key gives the user access to many unit X X X X X X X X X
and system operating parameters at the time of a unit
or system safety shutdown. When the HISTORY key is Displays Local or Remote control selection.
pressed the following message is displayed.
C O N T R O L MO D E
D I S P L A Y S A F E T Y S H U T- S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E
D O W N N O . 1 ( 1 T O 6 )

Displays the type of DSCH Air Temp Control (OAT or

While this message is displayed, the ↑ (UP) arrow key Suct Press.
can be used to select any of the six history buffers. Buf-
fer number 1 is the most recent, and buffer number 6 is L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
the oldest safety shutdown that was saved. X X X X X X X X

After selecting the shutdown number, pressing the EN-

TER key displays the following message which shows Displays the type of lead/lag control; Manual System
when the shutdown occurred. 1, Manual System 2 or Automatic. This is only select-
able on 2-system units.
S H U T D O W N O C C U R R E D
0 3 : 5 6 P M 2 9 J A N 0 2 F A N C O N T R O L
D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E

Pressing the ↓ (DOWN) arrow key repeatedly from the

DISPLAY SAFETY SHUTDOWN NO. X displays the Displays the type of fan control; Discharge Pressure or
software version. Ambient and Discharge Pressure.

S O F T W A R E V E R S I O N M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E
C . M 0 8 . 1 4 . 0 2 X X X X X X X X X

The ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to Displays whether Manual Override was Enabled or
scroll forward and backward through the history buffer Disabled.
to display the shutdown conditions stored at the instant
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K
the fault occurred. The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
through the displays in the order they appear below:
U N I T F A U L T : Displays type of Current Feedback utilized.
L O W S U C T P R E S S
S O F T S T A R T
X X X X X X X
Displays the type of fault that occurred.
U N I T T Y P E
Displays whether the optional European Soft Start was
C O N D E N S I N G U N I T
installed and selected.

Displays the type of unit; Liquid, Condensing Unit or D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E

Heat Pump. C U T O U T = X X X X P S I G

A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
Displays the programmed Discharge Pressure Cutout.
X X X X X X X X X X
S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E
Displays the type of Ambient Control; Standard or C U T O U T = X X X X P S I G
Low Ambient.
Displays the programmed Suction Pressure Cutout.

122 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

L O W A M B I E N T T E M P S Y S 2 SP = X X X X P S I G
C U T O U T = X X X . X ° F R A N G E = + / - X X X P S I G

Displays the SP Setpoint and Control Range if SP Con-

Displays the programmed Low Ambient Cutout. trol is selected.
F A N C O N T R O L O N A M B I E N T A I R T E M P
P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G = X X X . X ° F

Displays the programmed Fan On Pressure.

Displays the Ambient Temp. at the time of the fault.
F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L O F F
L E A D S Y S T E M I S
P R E S S U R E = P S I G
S Y S T E M N U M B E R X

Displays the programmed Fan Off Differential. Displays which system is in the lead at the time of the
fault.
S Y S 1 T R I P V O L T S
= X . X V O L T S E V A P P U M P I S X X X
E V A P H E A T E R I S X X X

Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage. Displays status of the Evaporator Pump and Heater
S Y S 2 T R I P V O L T S
(not installed on a YCUL) at the time of the fault.
= X . X V O L T S A C T I V E R E M O T E C T R L
X X X X
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
Displays whether Remote Control was active when the
D I S C H A R G E A I R T E M P
fault occurred.
= X X X. X °F
U N I T A C T U A L A M P S
= X X X . X A M P S
Displays the Discharge Air Temp if Discharge Air
Temp Control is selected.
7
S E T P O I N T = X X X . X ° F This is only displayed when the Current Feedback op-
R A N G E = + / - ° F tion is one for each unit.
S Y S X C O M P S T A T U S
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the 1 = X X X 2 = X X X 3 = X X X
unit is programmed for DAT Control Mode.
Displays which Compressors were running in the sys-
S E T P O I N T = X X X . X ° F
tem when the fault occurred.
R A N G E = + X X . X ° F
S Y S X R U N T I M E
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the X X - X X - X X - X X D - H - M - S
unit is programmed for Discharge Air Control.
S Y S 1 SP = X X X X P S I G Displays the system run time when the fault occurred.
R A N G E = + / - X X X P S I G

JOHNSON CONTROLS 123

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

S Y S X S P = X X X X P S I G Displays for System 1 starting with SYS X NUMBER

D P = X X X X P S I G OF COMPS RUNNING X through SYS X AMPS =
XXX.X VOLTS = X.X will be displayed first, fol-
lowed by displays for System 2.
Displays the system Suction and Discharge Pressure of
the time of the fault. Further explanation of the above displays is cov-
ered under the STATUS, OBeforeDATA, COOLING
S Y S X S U C T = X X X . X ° F SETPOINTS, PROGRAM, and OPTIONS keys.
S A T S U C T = X X X . X ° F
Software version
Displays the System Suction Temp and Saturated Suc-
The software version may be viewed by first pressing
tion Temp when an EEV is installed.
the HISTORY key and then the ↓ (DOWN) arrow key.
S Y S X L L S V I S X X X After pressing the HISTORY key, the display safety
H O T G A S S O L I S X X X shutdown message will be displayed.

Displays whether the System Liquid Line Solenoid or D I S P L A Y S A F E T Y S H U T -

Hot Gas Solenoid was energized at the time of the fault. D O W N N O . 1 ( 1 T O 6 )

S Y S X F A N S T A G E X X X
After the ↓ (DOWN) arrow key is pressed, the software
version will appear.
S O F T W A R E V E R S I O N
Displays the number of Fan Stages in the system active
C . M 0 8 . 1 4 . 0 2
at the time of the fault.
S Y S X A C T U A L A M P S
= X X X . X A M P S

Displays the system Amperage (calculated approxi-

mately) at the time of the fault.
For this message to appear, CURRENT FEEDBACK
ONE BeforeSYSTEM must be programmed under the
OPTIONS key. If the microboard is programmed as
one CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE BeforeUNIT un-
der the PROGRAM key, the display will be the first
display before the SYS 1 info. If the microboard is pro-
grammed for CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no cur-
rent display will appear.

124 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Entry keys

00068VIP
7
The ENTRY keys allows the user to view, change Enter/Adv key
programmed values. The ENTRY keys consist of an The ENTER/ADV key must be pushed after any change
↑ (UP) arrow key, ↓ (DOWN) arrow key, and an EN- is made to the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, safety
TER/ADV key. setpoints, chiller options, and the clock. Pressing this
key “enters” the new values into memory. If the EN-
Up and down arrow keys
TER/ADV key is not pressed after a value is changed,
Used in conjunction with the OBeforeDATA, HIS- the changes will not be “entered” and the original val-
TORY, COOLING SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/AD- ues will be used to control the chiller.
VANCE DAY, OPTIONS and CLOCK keys, the ↑
(UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys allow the user to scroll Programming and a description on the use of the ↑ (UP)
through the various data screens. Refer to the section arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV
on “Display/Print” keys for specific information on the keys are covered in detail under the SETPOINTS, and
displayed information and specific use of the ↑ (UP) UNIT keys.
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys.
The ↑ (UP) arrow key and ↓ (DOWN) arrow key are
also used for programming the control panel such as
changing numerical or text values when programming
cooling setpoints, setting the daily schedule, changing
safety setpoints, unit options, and setting the clock.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 125

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Setpoints keys

00069VIP

Programming of the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, L O C A L D I S C H A R G E

and safeties is accomplished by using the keys located A I R T E M P C O N T R O L
under the SETPOINTS section.
The three keys involved are labeled COOLING This message indicates that the cooling setpoint is un-
SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY, and der LOCAL control. That is, the cooling setpoint is
PROGRAM. controlling to the locally programmed setpoint. The
message also indicates that the control point is based
The following are instructions for programming the on Discharge Air temperature leaving the evaporator
respective setpoints. The same instruction should be coil.
used to view the setpoints with the exception that the
setpoint will not be changed. L O C A L S U C T I O N
P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
Cooling setpoints
The Cooling setpoint and Range can be programmed This message indicates that the cooling setpoint is un-
by pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key. After der LOCAL control (the cooling setpoint is controlling
pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key, the Cooling to the locally programmed cooling setpoint). However,
Mode (Discharge Air Temperature or Suction Pressure unlike the previous message, it is now indicating that
Control) will be displayed for a few seconds, and then the control point is based on Suction Pressure.
the setpoint entry screen will be displayed. R E MO T E D I S C H A R G E
Unit must first be checked for “Unit Type A I R T E M P C O N T R O L
- Condensing Unit” under the OPTION
key to allow programming of appropriate This message indicates that the cooling setpoint is un-
setpoints. This is accomplished by the der REMOTE control. When under remote control, the
jumbeforebetween J11-7 and J11-12 on cooling setpoint will be determined by a remote device
the I/O Board. such as an ISN control. The message also indicates that
the control point is based on Discharge Air Tempera-
The following are the four possible messages that can ture leaving the evaporator.
be displayed after pressing the COOLING SETPOINT
key, indicating the cooling mode:

126 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

R E MO T E S U C T I O N
On two system units, each system is controlled inde-
P R E S S U R E C O N T R O L
pendently of each other according to its own setpoint
and cooling range, so there will be two similar displays;
This message indicates that the cooling setpoint is un- a setpoint and range for both system 1 and system 2.
der REMOTE control. When under remote control, the
cooling setpoint will be determined by a remote device The Suction Pressure SETPOINTS are programmable
such as an ISN control. This message also indicates from 60 psig to 90 psig. The Control Range is pro-
that the control point is based on Suction Pressure. grammable from 2 psig to 10 psig.

Immediately after the control mode message is dis- Both Discharge Air Temperature and Suction Pressure
played, the COOLING SETPOINT entry screen will be control are described in detail under the section on Ca-
displayed. If the unit is programmed for Discharge Air pacity Control.
Temperature the following message will be displayed: Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS again, after set-
S E T P O I N T = 5 5 . 0 ° F
ting the “local” setpoint(s), will display the remote set-
R A N G E = + / - 5 . 0 ° F
point and cooling range. This display automatically up-
dates about every 2 seconds. Notice that these setpoints
are not “locally” programmable, but are controlled by a
(Discharge Air Temperature control) remote device such as an ISN control. These setpoints
The above message shows the current Discharge Air would only be valid if the unit was operating in the
temperature SETPOINT at 55.0°F (notice the cursor REMOTE mode. The following messages illustrate
positioned under the number 5). Pressing either the both Discharge Air Temperature and Suction Pressure
UP or DOWN arrow will change the setpoint in 0.5°F control respectively.
increments. After using the UP and DOWN arrows to R E M S E T P = 5 5 . 0 ° F
adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key R A N G E = + / - 5 . 0 ° F
must be pressed to enter this number into memory and
advance to the RANGE SETPOINT.
(Discharge Air Temperature control)
This will be indicated by the cursor moving under the
R E M SP X = 1 0 5 P S I G
RANGE setpoint. The ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow
R A N G E = +/- 3 P S I G
keys are used to set the RANGE, in 0.5 °F increments,
to the desired RANGE setpoint. After adjusting the set- 7
point, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter (Suction Pressure control)
the data into memory.
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS again will bring
The Discharge Air temperature SETPOINT is pro- up the display that allows the Maximum EMS-PWM
grammed from 45°F (7.2°C) to 70°F (21.1°C). The Temperature Reset to be programmed. This message is
Control Range is programmed from 3.0°F (-16.1°C) to shown below.
10°F (-12.0°C).
M A X E M S - PWM R E MO T E
If the unit was programmed for Suction Pressure con- T E M P R E S E T = + 2 0 ° F
trol, the following message would be displayed instead
of the previous message.
The Temp Reset value is the maximum allowable reset
S Y S X SP = 1 0 5 P S I G of the Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint. The set-
R A N G E = +/- 3 P S I G point can be reset upwards by the use of a contact clo-
sure on the PWM Temp Reset input (CTB1 terminals
(Suction Pressure control) 13 - 20). See the section on Operating Controls for a
detailed explanation of this feature.
The setpoint and range are programmed with the ↑ (UP)
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV key as de- As with the other setpoints, the ↑ (UP) Arrow and ↓
scribed in the previous setpoint message. The setpoints (DOWN) arrow keys are used to change the Temp Re-
in Suction Pressure Control are the suction pressures set value. After using the UP and DOWN arrows to ad-
of each individual system on the condensing Unit and just to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must
will control to within plus or minus the cooling range. be pressed to enter this number into memory.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 127

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

The low limit, high limit, and default values for the The times may be set using the same procedure as de-
keys under “SETPOINTS” are listed in Table 14. scribed above for the days of the week. After chang-
ing the meridian of the stop time, pressing the ENTER/
Schedule/Advance Day key ADV key will advance the schedule to the following
The SCHEDULE is a seven day daily schedule that al- display:
lows one start/stop time each day. The schedule can
S _ M T W T F S
be programmed Monday through Sunday with an al-
H O L I D A Y N O T E D B Y *
ternate holiday schedule available. If no start/stop
times are programmed, the unit will run on demand,
providing the unit is not shut off on a unit or system The line below the empty space next to the S is the
shutdown. The daily schedule is considered “not pro- cursor and will move to the next empty space when
grammed” when the times in the schedule are all zeros the ENTER/ADV key is pressed. To set the Holiday,
(00:00 AM). the cursor is moved to the space following the day of
the week of the holiday and the ↑ (UP) arrow key is
To set the schedule, press the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE pressed. An * will appear in the space signifying that
DAY key. The display will immediately show the fol- day as a holiday. The * can be removed by pressing the
lowing display. ↓ (DOWN) arrow key.
The Holiday schedule must be programmed weekly.
MO N S T A R T = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
Once the holiday schedule runs, it will revert to the
S T O P = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
normal daily schedule.
The line under the 0 is the cursor. It may be changed Program key
by using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until
There are ten operating parameters under the PRO-
correct. Pressing the ENTER/ADV key will enter the
GRAM key that are programmable. These setpoints
times and then move the cursor to the minute box. The
can be changed by pressing the PROGRAM key, and
operation is then repeated if necessary. This process
then the ENTER/ADV key to enter Program Mode.
may be followed until the hour, minutes, and meridian
Continuing to press the ENTER/ADV key will display
(AM or PM) of both the START and STOP points are
each operating parameter. While a particular parameter
set. After changing the meridian of the stop time, press-
is being displayed, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow
ing the ENTER/ADV key will advance the schedule to
keys can be used to change the value. After the value
the next day.
is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to
Whenever the daily schedule is changed enter the data into memory. Table 15 shows the pro-
for Monday, all the other days will change grammable limits and default values for each operating
to the new Monday schedule. This means parameter.
if the Monday times are not applicable
for the whole week then the exceptional The following are the displays for the programmable
days would need to be reprogrammed to values in the order they appear:
the desired schedule.
d D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E
To page to a specific day press the SCHEDULE/AD- C U T O U T = 5 7 0 P S I G
VANCE DAY key. The start and stop time of each day
may be programmed differently using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT is the discharge
(DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV keys. pressure at which the system will shutdown as moni-
After SUN (Sunday) schedule appears on the display tored by the optional discharge transducer. This is a
a subsequent press of the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE software shutdown that acts as a backup for the me-
DAY key will display the Holiday schedule. This is a chanical high pressure switch located in the refrigerant
two part display. The first reads: circuit. The system can restart when the discharge pres-
sure drops 40 psig (2.76 barg) below the cutout point.
H O L S T A R T = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
S T O P = 0 0 : 0 0 A M

128 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

If the optional discharge pressure transducer is not in- F A N C O N T R O L O N

stalled, this programmable safety would not apply. It P R E S S U R E = XX X P S I G
should be noted that every system has a mechanical
high pressure cutout that protects against excessive
The Fan Control On-Pressure is the programmed pres-
high discharge pressure regardless of whether or not
sure value that is used to stage the condenser fans ON,
the optional discharge pressure is installed.
in relation to discharge pressure. See Condenser Fan
S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E Control in SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION and Table
C U T O U T = 8 0 . 0 P S I G 20, Table 21, and Table 22.
The microprocessor will not allow program-
The SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT protects the ming the “FAN CONTROL ON PRES-
unit from a coil freeze-up or compressor damage. If SURE” minus the “FAN CONTROL
the suction pressure drops below the cutout point, the DIFFERENTIAL OFF PRESSURE”
system will shut down. below 160 psig. This ensures discharge
There are some exceptions when the suc- pressure does not drop too low.
tion pressure is permitted to temporarily
F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L O F F
drop below the cutout point. Details are
PR E S S U R E = XX X P S I G
explained under the topic of System Safe-
ties.
The Fan Differential Off Pressure is the programmed
L OW A M B I E N T T E M P
differential pressure value that is used to stage the con-
C U T O U T = 2 5 . 0 ° F
denser fans OFF, in relation to discharge pressure. See
Condenser Fan Control in SECTION 8 – UNIT OP-
ERATION and Table 20, Table 21, and Table 22.
The LOW AMBIENT TEMP CUTOUT allows the
user to select the unit outside ambient temperature cut- The microprocessor will not allow program-
out point. If the ambient falls below this point, the unit ming the “FAN CONTROL ON PRES-
will shut down. Restart can occur when temperature SURE” minus the “FAN CONTROL
rises 2°F (1.11°C) above the cutout setpoint. DIFFERENTIAL OFF PRESSURE”
below 160 psig. This ensures discharge
A N T I R E C Y C L E T I M E R pressure does not drop too low. 7
= 6 0 0 S E C
T O T A L N U M B E R O F
The programmable anti-recycle timer ensures that C OM P R E S S O R S = 6
systems do not cycle. This timer is programmable un-
der the PROGRAM key between 300 - 600 seconds. The TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS is the
Whenever possible, to reduce cycling and motor heat- amount of compressors in the unit, and determines the
ing, the anti-recycle timer should be adjusted as high as stages of cooling available. Notice in Table 15 that the
possible. The programmable anti-recycle timer starts selection available will vary depending on the unit type
the timer when the first compressor in a system starts. (single or two system).
The timer begins to count down. If all the compressors
This MUST be programmed correctly to
in the circuit cycle OFF, a compressor within the cir-
ensure probeforecondensing unit opera-
cuit will not be permitted to start until the anti-recycle
tion.
timer has timed out. If the lead system has run for less
than 5 minutes, 3 times in a row, the anti-recycle timer
will be extended to 10 minutes maximum.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 129

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

A single system condensing unit MUST For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 100A:
have a jumbeforebetween terminals 5 V x 100 A 625 VA
13 - 17 on terminal block CTB1. If the x 1.25 = = 2.8 V
225 A 225 A
jumbeforeis not installed, the unit will
act as a 2-system unit. The jumbeforeis
only checked by the microboard at unit The programmed value will be 2.8V. A similar calcula-
power-up. If the jumbeforeis removed, tion and programming will be necessary for the other
power must be removed and re-applied to system in a 2-system unit.
register the change in memory.
460 VAC unit trip volts
N U M B E R O F F A N S
For total unit high current trip programming on 460
P E R S Y S T E M = X
VAC units:

The number of fans in each system is programmed for • Add the sum of all the compressor and fan RLA’s
the total number of fans on each system, or the total in the unit
number on the condensing unit divided by 2. • Multiply the sum by 1.25
This MUST be programmed correctly to
• Divide by 225 A
ensure probeforecondensing unit opera-
tion. • The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed
For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 180 A:

S Y S X T R I P V O L T S
5 V x 180 A 1125 VA
= X. X V O L T S x 1.25 = = 5.0 V
225 A 225 A

U N I T T R I P V O L T S The programmed value will be 5.0 V.

= X. X V O L T S
208/230 VAC units
Depending on the Current Feedback option, the trip On 208/230 VAC units, the process is similar, but
voltage for a specific system or unit high current trip instead of performing the calculation using 225 A, a
can be programmed. It also calibrates the current read- number of 450 A must be substituted.
out under the OBeforeDATA key. The approximate
R E MO T E UN I T I D
programmed value is calculated using the following
P R O G R A MM E D = X
formulas:

460 VAC system trip volts When communications is required with a BAS or Op-
For individual system high current trip programming tiView Panel, individual unit IDs are necessary for
on 460 VAC units: communications with specific units on a single RS-485
line. ID 0-7 is selectable.
• Add the sum of the compressor and fan RLA’s in
the system
• Multiply the sum by 1.25
• Divide by 225 A
• The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed

130 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 13 - Cooling Setpoints Programmable Limits and Defaults

SETPOINT VALUE LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT
45.0 °F 70.0°F 55.0°F
Discharge air temp. setpoint
7.2°C 21.1°C 12.7°C
3.0°F 10.0°F 5.0°F
Discharge air temp. range
1.7°C 5.6°C 2.8°C
102 psig 155 psig 122 psig
Suction pressure setpoints
7.03 barg 10.7 barg 8.4 barg
3 psig 16 psig 5 psig
Suction pressure range
0.21 barg 1.1 barg 0.34 barg
2°F 40°F 20°F
Max EMS - PWM remote temp. reset
1°C 22°C 11°C

Table 14 - Program Key Limits and Defaults

PROGRAM VALUE MODE LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT

325 psig 575 psig 570 psig
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT --
22.4 barg 39.6 barg 39.3 barg
80.0 psig 120.0 psig 80.0 psig
SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT
5.52 barg 8.27 barg 5.52 barg
25.0°F 60.0°F 25.0°F
STANDARD AMBIENT
-3.9°C 15.6°C -3.9°C
LOW AMBIENT TEMP. CUTOUT
0°F 60.0°F 25.0°F
LOW AMBIENT
-17.8°C 15.6°C -3.9°C
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER -- 300 s 600 s 600 s
360 psig 485 psig 385 psig
FAN CONTROL ON PRESSURE --
24.8 barg 33.4 barg 26.5 barg
80 psig 160 psid* 125 psid 7
FAN DIFFERENTIAL OFF PRESSURE --
5.51 barg 11.03 barg* 8.0 barg
SINGLE SYSTEM 2 3 3
TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS
TWO SYSTEMS 4 6 6
NUMBER OF FANS BeforeSYSTEM 3 4 3
CURRENT FEEDBACK
UNIT/SYSTEM TRIP VOLTS OPTION ENABLED 0.5 V 4.5 V 2V
ONE BeforeUNIT
REMOTE UNIT ID -- 0 7 0

* The minimum discharge pressure allowed is 160 psig. The fan differential Off Pressure will be lowered to prevent going below 235 psig
based on where the fan control On Pressure is programmed.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 131

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 15 - Setpoints Quick Reference List

ObeforeData quick reference list

Table 15 on page 132 provides a quick reference of
the setpoints list for the SETPOINTS keys.

SETPOINTS KEYS

Cooling Setpoints Key Schedule/ Program Mode

(press key to adv.) Advance Day Key (press enter to adv.)

Local/Remote Discharge Mon. – Sun. Discharge

Air or Suction Pressure & Pressure
Control Mode Schedule Cutout
(Display Only)

Suction
Setpoint Holiday Pressure
& Schedule Cutout
Range

Remote Setpoint Low Ambient Temp.

& Cutout
Range
(Display Only)

EMS - PWM Anti-Recycle

Remote Temp Timer
Reset Setpoint
(Discharge Air Temp mode only)
Fan Control
On-Pressure

Fan Differential
Off-Pressure

Total Numbers
of
Compressors

Number of
Fans Per System
YCUL0096 - 0130 ONLY

SYS / Unit
Trip Volts Option

Remote Unit ID

SYS 1 & 2
Superheat Setpoints

LD08696

132 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Unit keys

OPTIONS

CLOCK

00070VIP

Options key This turns system 1 OFF

There are many user programmable options under the or
OPTIONS key. The OPTIONS key is used to scroll S Y S 1 S W I T C H O F F
through the list of options by repeatedly pressing the S Y S 2 S W I T C H O F F
OPTIONS key. After the selected option has been dis-
played, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are then This turns systems 1 and 2 OFF.
used to change that particular option. After the option Turning a system OFF with its system
is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to switch allows a pumpdown to be per-
enter the data into memory. Table 17 shows the pro- formed before shutdown.
grammable options. The following are the displays in
the order they appear:

Option 1 – Language
D I S P L A Y L A N G U A G E Option 3 – Ambient Control Type 7
E N G L I S H
A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
S T A N D A R D
English, Spanish, French, German, and Italian can be
programmed. The low ambient cutout is adjustable from 25°F to 60°F
(-3.9°C to 15.6°C).
Option 2 – S
 ystem Switches
(two system units only) or
(Single System Display is similar) A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
L OW A M B I E N T
S Y S 1 S W I T C H O N
S Y S 2 S W I T C H O N The low ambient cutout is programmable down to 0°F
(-17.8°C). A low ambient kit MUST be installed for
This allows both systems to run
this option to be chosen. If the kit is NOT installed,
or and low ambient is selected, low pressure faults and
compressor damage may occur.
S Y S 1 S W I T C H O N
S Y S 2 S W I T C H O F F The software may skip the low ambient
selection, but a low ambient kit is still
This turns system 2 OFF needed to operate below 25°F (-3.9°C).

S Y S 1 S W I T C H O F F
S Y S 2 S W I T C H O N

JOHNSON CONTROLS 133

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Option 4 – Local/Remote Control Type Option 7 – L

 ead/Lag Type
L O C A L / R E MO T E MO D E L
(two system units only)
L O C A L L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
M A N U A L S Y S 1 L E A D
When programmed for LOCAL, an ISN or RCC con-
trol can be used to monitor only. The micro panel will SYS 1 selected as lead compressor. SYS 1 lead option
operate on locally programmed values and ignore all MUST be chosen if Hot Gas Bypass is installed.
commands from the remote devices. The condensing
unit will communicate and send data to the remote or
monitoring devices. L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
M A N U A L S Y S 2 L E A D
or
L O C A L / R E MO T E MO D E SYS 2 selected as lead compressor.
R E MO T E
or
This mode should be selected when an ISN or RCC L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
control is to be used to control the condensing unit. A U T O M A T I C
This mode will allow the ISN to control the follow-
ing items: Remote Start/Stop, Cooling Setpoint, Load
Lead/lag between systems may be selected to help
Limit, and History Buffer Request. If the unit receives
equalize average run hours between systems on con-
no valid ISN transmission for 5 minutes, it will revert
densing units with 2 refrigerant systems. Auto lead/lag
back to the locally programmed values.
allows automatic lead/lag of the two systems based on
Option 5 – Unit Control Mode an average run hours of the compressors in each sys-
tem. A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all
C O N T R O L MO D E compressors shut down. The microboard will then as-
S U C T I O N PR E S S U R E
sign the “lead” to the system with the shortest average
run time.
Unit control is based on Suction Pressure Control.
Option 8 – Condenser Fan Control Mode
or
F A N C O N T R O L
C O N T R O L MO D E D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E
D I S C H A R G E A I R
Condenser fans are controlled by discharge pressure
Unit control is based on Discharge Air Temp. Control. only. This mode may only be chosen when discharge
pressure transducers are installed.
Option 6 – Display Units F A N C O N T R O L
D I S P L A Y U N I T S A M B I E N T & D S C H P R E S S
I M P E R I A L
Condenser fans are controlled by ambient temperature
This mode displays system operating values in Impe- and discharge pressure. This mode must be chosen if
rial units of °F or psig. the discharge pressure transducers are not installed.
or
D I S P L A Y U N I T S
S I

This mode displays system operating values in Scien-

tific International units of °C or barg.

134 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Option 9 – Manual Override Mode Option 11 – Power Fail Restart

M A N U A L O V E R R I D E MO D E P O W E R F A I L R E S T A R T

D I S A B L E D A U T O M A T I C

This option allows overriding of the daily schedule Unit auto restarts after a power failure.
that is programmed. MANUAL OVERRIDE MODE –
P O W E R F A I L R E S T A R T

DISABLED indicates that override mode has no effect.
M A N U A L
or

M A N U A L O V E R R I D E MO D E
After a power failure, the UNIT switch must be tog-
E N A B L E D
gled before restart at the unit is allowed. NORMALLY
MANUAL RESTART should NOT BE SELECTED.
Manual Override Mode is enabled. This is a service Option 12 – Soft Start Enable/Disable
function and when enabled, will allow the unit to start
S O F T S TART
when shut down on the daily schedule. It will auto-
D I S A B L E D
matically be disabled after 30 minutes.

Option 10 – C
 urrent Feedback Options SOFT START “DISABLED” MUST be selected on all
Installed units.
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K This message may not be viewable on non-European
N O N E units.

This mode should be selected when the panel is not Option 13 – Unit Type
equipped with current sensing capability. U N I T T Y P E
C O N D E N S I N G UN I T
or
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K The UNIT TYPE message cannot be modified under
O N E P E R U N I T the unit keys. 7
“CONDENSING UNIT” must be dis-
This mode should be selected when an optional module played, or damage to compressors or other
is installed to allow combined current monitoring of all components will occur if operated in the
systems by sensing current on the incoming line. Cur- HEAT PUMP or LIQUID CHILLER
rent input is to J8-5 of the microboard. modes.
or
If unit type needs to be changed to make the unit a
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K condensing unit, add a jumbeforebetween J11-7 and
O N E P E R S Y S T E M J11-12, of the microboard and reapply power to the
micropanel.
This mode should be selected when an optional mod-
ule is installed to allow individual current monitoring
of each system. SYS 1 input is to J7-4 to J7-12 of the
microboard. SYS 2 input is to J9-4 to J9-12 of the mi-
croboard.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 135

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Option 14 – Refrigerant Type F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E

R E F R I G E R A N T T Y P E E N A B L E D
R - 4 0 7 C
Press the ENTER key and the following message will
Refrigerant type R-22, R-407C or R410A may be se- be displayed until the update has been completed. The
lected under Service Mode. Refrigerant type is dis- keypad and display will not respond during the update.
played under the OPTIONS key, but is only program- DO NOT reset or power down the unit until the update
mable in Service Mode. is completed.
Incorrect programming may cause dam- F L A S H C A R D U P D A T I N G
age to compressors. R-410A MUST be P L E A S E W A I T . . .
programmed.
After the update is completed, an automatic reboot will
occur. If an error occurred, the following message will
appear with the error code and no reboot will occur.
Option 15 – Expansion Valve Type
E X P A N S I O N V A L V E T Y P E F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E
T H E R M O S T A T I C E R R O R X XXXX

The expansion valve type must be thermostatic or elec- If the update resulted in an error, the original program
tronic may be selected under Service Mode. Expansion will still be active. When an error occurs, ensure the
valve type is displayed under the OPTIONS key, but is correct Flash Card was utilized. Incorrect unit software
programmable in Service Mode. will cause an error. If this is not the case, the Flash
Card is most likely defective or the IPU and I/O combo
Incorrect programming may cause dam-
board is bad.
age to compressors.
Option 17 – Remote Temperature Reset
R E M O T E T E M P R E S E T
IN P U T X XXXXXXXXXXXXX

Also see the Unit Keys Programming Quick Reference

List in Table 17. Remote Temp Reset input selection is programmable
according to the type of input utilized. The following
Option 16 – Flash Card Update options are available:
F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E • DISABLED (default)
D I S A B L E D
• 0.0 – 10.0 VDC
A Flash Card is used to input the operating program • 2.0 – 10.0 VDC
into the unit IPU. A Flash Card is used instead of an • 0.0 – 20.0 mA
EPROM. Normally, a Flash Card update is not required
and the message above will be displayed. • 4.0 – 20.0 mA
The options display message for Remote
If the operating software is to be updated, insert the
Temp Reset Input only appears if the Temp
Flash Card into the Flash Card input port. Turn off the
reset Option is enabled under Service
unit switch and set the FLASH CARD UPDATE TO
Mode.
“ENABLED” using the ↑ and ↓ keys.

136 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Option 18 – Hot Gas Bypass Type Clock

The Hot Gas Bypass Type must be programmed based The CLOCK display shows the current day, time, and
on the option installed. Some chillers will not have hot date. Pressing the CLOCK key will show the current
gas bypass installed. Others will have it installed on day, time, and date.
System #1, System #2 or both systems.
It is important that the date and time be correct, other-
The selected option is only displayed under the OP- wise the daily schedule will not function as desired if
TIONS key and must be programmed under the Ser- programmed. In addition, for ease of troubleshooting
vice Mode. via the History printouts, the day, time, and date should
be correct.
H O T G A S B Y P A S S T Y P E
N O N E To change the day, time, and date press the CLOCK
key. The display will show something similar to the
H O T G A S B Y P A S S T Y P E following:
S Y S T E M 1 T O D A Y I S F R I 0 8 : 5 1 A M
2 5 J A N 0 8
H O T G A S B Y P A S S T Y P E
S Y S T E M 2 The line under the F is the cursor. If the day is correct,
press the ENTER/ADV key. The cursor will move un-
H O T G A S B Y P A S S T Y P E der the 0 in 08 hours. If the day is incorrect, press the
B O T H S Y S T E M S ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired day
is displayed and then press the ENTER/ADV key at
which time the day will be accepted and the cursor will
Option 19– Data Logging move under the first digit of the “2 digit hour”. In a
This should be disabled. similar manner, the hour, minute, meridian, month, day,
and year may be programmed, whenever the cursor is
D A T A L O G T O F L A S H C A R D under the first letter/numeral of the item. Press the ↑
O F F (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired hour,
minute, meridian; day, month, and year are displayed.
Also see the Unit Keys Programming Quick Refrence Pressing the ENTER/ADV key will save the valve and 7
List in Table 17. move the cursor on to the next programmable variable.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 137

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 7 – Unit controls
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 16 - Options Key Programming Quick Reference List

Options Key
Expansion Valve Type
(Press Options Key
to Adv.) (Thermoplastic or Electric)
(Programmed Under Service
Display Language Mode, Viewable Only)
Must be Programmed

System Switches for Thermostatic

On/Off
Flashcard CardUpdate
Flash Card Update
Ambient Control
(Standard or Low) Remote Temp
Remote Temp Reset
Reset

Local/Remote Mode
Flashcard Data Logging

Unit Control Mode Hot Gas Bypass Type

(DAT or Suct Press)

Data Logging
Display Units
(English or Metric)

System Lead/Lag Control

(Manual or Automatic)

Fan Control Mode

Manual Override Mode

Current Feedback Option

Power Failure Restart

Soft Start Option

Unit Type
"Condensing Unit" MUST be
Selected Via Jumper Installed
(Viewable Only)

Refrigerant Type R410A

(Programmed Under Service Mode)
(Viewable Only

LD13348

This table provides a quick reference list for the OPTIONS key setpoints.

138 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 8 – Unit operation

Capacity control Discharge pressure limit controls

To initiate the start sequence of the unit, all run permis- The discharge pressure limit controls unload a system
sive inputs must be satisfied (air proving/remote start/ before it reaches a safety limit due to high load or dirty
stop switch), and no unit or system faults exist. condenser coils. The microboard monitors discharge
pressure and unloads a system, if fully loaded, by one
The first phase of the start sequence is initiated by the compressor when discharge pressure exceeds the pro-
Daily Schedule Start or a Remote Cycling Device. If grammed cutout minus 10 psig (0.69 barg). Reloading
the unit is shut down on the daily schedule, the evapo- will occur when the discharge pressure on the affected
rator blower contacts (Terminals 23 and 24 of TB1) system drops to 85% of the unload pressure and 10
will close when the daily schedule start time has been minutes have elapsed.
reached. Once the air proving switch closes, capacity
control functions are initiated. This control is only applicable if optional discharge
pressure transducers are installed.
If unit cycling is accomplished with a remote cycling
device wired in series with the air proving switch, the Discharge air temperature control
evaporator contacts will always be energized as long
as the unit switch is turned ON. When the air proving The setpoint in Discharge Air Temperature Control
switch and remote cycling contacts are closed, the ca- is the temperature the condensing unit will control to
pacity control functions will be initiated. within plus or minus the control range. The setpoint
High Limit is the Setpoint plus the Cooling Range. The
It should be noted that the evaporator contacts (Termi- Setpoint Low Limit is the Setpoint minus the Cooling
nals 23 and 24 of TB1) are not required to be used to Range. See Figure 40.
cycle the evaporator blower. However, in all cases the
air proving switch must be closed to allow unit opera- If the Discharge Air Temperature is above the Setpoint
tion. High Limit, the lead compressor on the lead system
will be energized along with the liquid line solenoid.
The control system will evaluate the need for cooling Upon energizing any compressor, the 60 second Anti-
by comparing the actual discharge air temperature or Coincidence timer will be initiated.
suction pressures to the desired setpoint, and regulate
the discharge air temperature or suction pressure to If after 180 seconds of run time the discharge air tem-
meet that desired setpoint. perature is still above the Setpoint High Limit, the next
compressor in sequence will be energized. Additional
loading stages are energized at a rate of once every 180 8
Suction pressure limit controls
seconds if the discharge air temperature remains above
The anticipatory controls are intended to prevent the the Setpoint High Limit.
unit from ever actually reaching a low-pressure cut-
out. Loading is prevented, if the suction pressure drops If the discharge air temperature falls below the Set-
below 1.15 x suction pressure cutout (15% below the point High Limit but is greater than the Setpoint Low
cutout). Loading may reoccur after suction pressure Limit, loading and unloading do not occur. This area of
rises above the unload point and a period of one min- control is called the control range.
ute elapses. This control is only operable if the optional
suction pressure transducers are installed. If the discharge air temperature drops below the Set-
point Low Limit, unloading occurs at a rate of 60 sec-
onds.
The sequences of Capacity Control (compressor staging)
for loading and unloading are shown in Table 17 on page
140 and Table 18 on page 140.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 139

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

20 sec. 30 sec. 60 sec. control range 60 sec.

unloading unloading unloading (no compressor staging) loading

51.5°F 52.5°F 53.0°F 55.0°F 57.0°

(10.8°C) (11.4°C) (11.7°C) (12.8°C) (13.9°C)
Low Limit Setpoint High limit

Discharge Air Temperature Control – Compressor Staging

Setpoint = 55.0°F (12.8°C) Range = +/- 5°F (-12.2°C)
Figure 40 - Discharge Air Temperature Control

Table 17 - Discharge Air Temperature Control for 5 and 6 Compressors (7 and 8 Steps)

LEAD SYSTEM LAG SYSTEM

*STEP COMP 1 COMP 2 COMP 3 COMP 1 COMP 2 COMP 3

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON+HG OFF OFF (See Note 1) OFF OFF OFF
2 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 ON OFF OFF (See Note 2) ON OFF OFF
4 ON ON OFF (See Note 3) OFF OFF OFF
5 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
6 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON ON ON OFF
8 ON ON ON ON ON ON
Notes:
1. Step 1 is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during Pumpdown. For Discharge Air
Temperature Control the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is energized only when the lead compressor is running and the DAT is less than SP, the
Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is turned OFF when the DAT is more than SP + CR/2.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
* STEP can be viewed using the OBeforeDATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.

Table 18 - Discharge Air Temperature Control for 4 Compressors (6 Steps)

LEAD SYSTEM LAG SYSTEM
*STEP COMP 1 COMP 2 COMP 1 COMP 2
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON+HG OFF (See Note 1) OFF OFF
2 ON OFF OFF OFF
3 ON OFF (See Note 2) ON OFF
4 ON ON (See Note 3) OFF OFF
5 ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON
* STEP can be viewed using the OBeforeDATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.

Notes:
1. Step 1 is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during Pumpdown. For Discharge Air
Temperature Control the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is energized only when the lead compressor is running and the DAT is less than SP, the
Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is turned OFF when the DAT is more than SP + CR/2.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
* STEP can be viewed using the OBeforeDATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.

140 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Suction pressure control

The setpoint in Suction Pressure Control is the suction If the suction pressure falls below the Setpoint High
pressures each individual system on the condensing Limit and greater than the Setpoint Low Limit, load-
unit will control to within plus or minus the cooling ing and unloading do not occur. This area of control is
range. The Setpoint High Limit is the Setpoint plus the called the control range.
Cooling Range. The Setpoint Low Limit is the Setpoint
minus the Cooling Range. Each system is controlled If the suction pressure falls below the Setpoint Low
independently of each other according to its setpoint Limit, unloading (compressors cycling OFF) occurs at
and cooling range. a rate of 30 seconds beforesystem. The zone thermostat
must be satisfied before the last compressor in the sys-
Each system must have its own zone thermostat. If the tem cycles OFF, even if the suction pressure is below
respective zone thermostat is closed, the lead compres- the Setpoint Low Limit.
sor on that system will be energized. In addition the
liquid line solenoid to that system will be energized. Hot Gas Bypass solenoid will be energized as the last
Upon energizing any compressor the 60 second Anti- stage of unloading. If the zone thermostat calls for
Coincidence timer will be initiated. cooling when the suction pressure is below the Set-
point Low Limit, the first stage compressor will be en-
If after 150 seconds of run-time the suction pressure is ergized with the hot gas solenoid.
still above the Setpoint High Limit, the next compres-
sor in sequence will be energized. Additional loading It should be noted that the zone thermostat has ultimate
stages are energized at a rate of once every 150 seconds control. As long as the zone thermostat is calling for
if the suction pressure remains above the Setpoint High cooling, at least one compressor will be running, re-
Limit. Each system will have its own load timer of 150 gardless of whether the suction pressure is below Set-
seconds. point Low Limit.
Figure 41 illustrates loading and unloading in Suction
Pressure Control Mode. See the section on SETPOINTS
KEYS for programmable values.

8
Setpoint Setpoint
Low Limit High Limit

30 second control range 150 second

unloading (no compressor staging) loading

117 psig (8.0 barg) 126 psig (8.7 barg)

Setpoint
121 psig (8.3 barg)

Setpoint = 121 psig (8.3 barg)

Control Range = 5 psig ( 0.35 barg)

Figure 41 - Suction Pressure Control

JOHNSON CONTROLS 141

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

System lead/lag Anti-coincidence timer

(Discharge Air Temp Control Only) This timer is not present on single-system units. Two
timing controls are present in software to ensure com-
Lead/lag between systems may be selected to help pressors within a circuit or between systems, do not start
equalize average run hours between systems on con- simultaneously. The anti-coincidence timer ensures
densing units with two refrigerant systems. This may there is at least a one minute delay between system starts
be programmed under the OPTIONS key. Auto lead/ on two circuit systems. This timer is NOT programma-
lag allows automatic lead/lag of the two systems based ble. The load timers further ensure that there is a mini-
on average run hours of the compressors in each sys- mum time between compressor starts within a system.
tem. Manual lead/lag selects specifically the sequence
in which the microboard starts systems. Systems in Evaporator blower control
Suction Pressure Control act independently based on
the individual Suction Pressure Control setpoints. The evaporator blower start contacts (TB1 - terminals 23
- 24) are energized when any of the following conditions
Compressor lead/lag are true:
The compressors within a system rotate starts in se- 1. Any compressor is running.
quence 1, 2 or 1, 2, 3 with wraparound. The longest
2. Daily Schedule is not programmed OFF and
OFF compressor in a system will start first, and the
Unit Switch is ON.
longest-running compressor in a system will turn OFF
first. When unloading, the system with the most com- The contacts will not close if the micropanel has been
pressors on unloads first. The lag system will shut powered up for less than 30 seconds or if the contacts
down a compressor first when equal numbers of com- have been closed in the last 30 seconds to prevent mo-
pressors are operating in each system. The microboard tor overheating. These contacts can be used to start the
will not attempt to equalize run time of compressors in evaporator blower, and for all practical purposes, will
a system. be running in a constant fan mode. However, if the
blower is desired to cycle with the compressors, then
Once the second system has started a compressor, the cycling of the evaporator blower can be achieved by
microboard will attempt to equally load each system. using the Run Contacts located at or TB1 - terminals
Once this occurs, loading alternates between systems. 27 to 28 for system two (if applicable).
If Soft Start is enabled on European models with this
option, compressor lead/lag will function as outlined in Evaporator heater control
Option 12 under the OPTIONS key. The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient air tem-
perature. When the ambient temperature drops below
Anti-recycle timer 40°F (4.4°C) the heater is turned ON. When the tem-
The programmable anti-recycle timer ensures that sys- perature rises above 45°F (7.2°C) the heater is turned
tems do not cycle. This timer is programmable under OFF. An under voltage condition will keep the heater
the PROGRAM key between 300 and 600 seconds. off until full voltage is restored to the system.
Whenever possible, to reduce cycling and motor heat-
ing, the anti-recycle timer should be adjusted to 600 Pumpdown control
seconds. The programmable anti-recycle timer starts Each system has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
the timer when the first compressor in a system starts. Manual pumpdown from the keypad is possible by
The timer begins to count down. If all of the compres- turning off the respective system’s switch under the
sors in a circuit cycle OFF, a compressor within the cir- OPTIONS key. On a non-safety, non-unit switch shut-
cuit will not be permitted to start until the anti-recycle down, all compressors but one in the system will be
timer has timed out. If the lead system has run for less shut OFF. The LLSV will also be turned OFF. The final
than five minutes, three times in a row, the anti-recycle compressor is allowed to run until the suction pressure
timer will be extended to 10 minutes. falls below the cutout, or for 180 seconds, whichever
comes first.

142 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 19 - YCUL0020 – YCUL0072 Condenser Fan Control Using Outdoor Ambient Temperature and Discharge
Pressure
(Discharge pressure controls will not function unless the optional discharge pressure transducer is installed)
I/O BOARD
FAN CONTACTOR FAN #
ON OFF OUTPUT
STAGE
SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
OAT < 20°F (-6.7°C)
1 OAT >25°F (-3.9°C)
AND
1 FAN OR 8M 11M TB7-9 TB10-9 3 4
DP < Fan Ctrl On Press –
FWD DP > Fan Ctrl On Press
(Diff. Press.)
OAT < 60°F (15.6°C)
OAT >65°F (18.3°C)
*3 AND TB7-8 TB10-8
OR 7M & 10M &
2 FANS DP < Fan Ctrl On Press.- & & 1&3 2&4
DP > Fan Ctrl On Press 8M 11M
FWD [Diff. Press + 40 psig TB7-9 TB10-9
+ 40 psig (2.76 barg)
(2.76 barg)]

Table 20 - YCUL0045 – YCUL0072 Condenser Fan Control Using Discharge Pressure Only

I/O BOARD
FAN CONTACTOR FAN #
ON OFF OUTPUT
STAGE
SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
1
DP > Fan Ctrl On DP < Fan Ctrl On Press –
1 FAN 8M 11M TB7-9 TB10-9 3 4
Press (Diff. Press.)
FWD
*3 DP > Fan Ctrl On TB7-8 TB10-8
DP < Fan Ctrl On Press.) – 7M & 10M
2 FANS Press & & 1&3 2&4
[(Diff Press.) + 40 psig (2.76 barg)] 8M & 11M
FWD + 40 psig (2.76 barg) TB7-9 TB10-9
* NOTE: STEP 2 is not active in the “Standard Ambient” mode. When changing to “Low Ambient” control, fan power wiring also changes.

Fan #4
Fan #3

Fan #1

LD07403A

Fan #2
Figure 42 - YCUL0045 – YCUL0072 Fan Location (Typical)

JOHNSON CONTROLS 143

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Condenser fan control - YCUL0020 – YCUL0072

Table 21 - YCUL0020 – YCUL0072 Low Ambient Condenser Fan Control – Discharge Pressure Control
I/O BOARD FAN #
FAN CONTACTOR
ON OFF OUTPUT
STAGE
SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
1
DP > Fan Ctrl On DP < Fan Ctrl On Press
1 FAN 7M 10M TB7-8 TB10-8 1 REV 2 REV
Press – Diff. Press.
REV
DP > Fan Ctrl On
2 DP < Fan Ctrl On Press.) –
Press 3 4
1 FAN [Diff Press. + 20 psig 8M 11M TB7-9 TB10-9
+ 20 psig FWD FWD
FWD (1.38 barg)]
(1.38 barg)
DP > Fan Ctrl On
3 DP < Fan Ctrl On Press.) – TB7-9
Press 11M & TB10-9 1&3 2&4
2 FANS [Diff Press. + 40 psig 8M & 9M &
+ 40 psig 12M & TB10-10 FWD FWD
FWD (2.76 barg)] TB7-10
(2.76 barg)

Table 22 - YCUL0020 – YCUL0035 Low Ambient Condenser Fan Control – Discharge Pressure Control
I/O BOARD
FAN STAGE ON OFF CONTACTOR FAN #
OUTPUT
"OAT > 25° F or "OAT < 20° F and
Stage 1 7M TB7-8 1 REV
DP > ctrl_press" DP < ctrl_press - diff_press"
"OAT > 45° F or "OAT < 40° F and
Stage 2 DP > ctrl_press + 20 DP < ctrl_press - diff_press + 20 8M TB7-9 3 FWD
psig" psig"

When low ambient control of the fans is

selected, fan control will be by discharge
pressure only.

144 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Load limiting Simultaneous operation of Remote Load

Limiting and EMS-PWM Temperature
Load Limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from
Reset (described on following pages)
loading beyond the desired value. Two and four com-
cannot occur.
pressor units can be load limited to 50%. This would
allow only one compressor beforesystem to run. three
and six compressor units can be load limited to 33% or
66%. The 66% limit would allow up to two compres- Compressor run status
sors beforesystem to run, and the 33% limit allows only
Compressor run status is indicated by closure of con-
one compressor beforesystem to run. Five compressor
tacts at TB1 – terminals 25 to 26 for system 1 and TB1
units may be load limited to 40% (one compressor be-
– terminals 27 to 28 for system 2. The respective con-
foresystem runs) or 80% (up to two compressors be-
tact will close anytime a compressor is running in that
foresystem) are permitted to run. No other values of
particular system.
limiting are available.
The compressor Run Status contacts can also be used
There are two ways to load limit the unit. The first is
to cycle the evaporator fan contactor with the compres-
through remote communication via an ISN. A second
sors.
way to load limit the unit is through closing contacts
connected to the Load Limit (CTB1 – terminals 13-21) Alarm status
and PWM inputs (CTB1 – terminals 13-20). Stage 1
of load limiting involves closing the Load Limit input. System or unit shutdown is indicated by normally-
Stage 2 of load limiting involves closing both the Load open contacts opening whenever the unit shuts down
Limit and PWM inputs. The first stage of limiting is on a unit fault, or locks out on a system fault. System 1
either 80%, 66% or 50%, depending on the number of alarm contacts are located at TB1 - terminals 29 to 30.
compressors on the unit. The second stage of limiting System 2 alarm contacts are located at TB1 - terminals
is either 40% or 33% and is only available on 3, 5 and 31 to 32. The alarm contacts close when conditions al-
6 compressor units. Table 23 shows the load limiting low the unit to operate.
permitted for the various numbers of compressors.

Table 23 - Compressor Operation – Load Limiting

COMPRESSORS IN UNIT STAGE 1 STAGE 2 8
2 50% -
3 66% 33%
4 50% -
5 80% 40%
6 66% 33%

JOHNSON CONTROLS 145

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 8 – Unit operation
Issue date: 4/30/2022

BAS/EMS discharge air temperature reset using

a voltage or current signal
The Remote Reset Option allows the Control Center of If a 4 mA to 20 mA signal is supplied, it is applied to
the unit to reset the discharge air temperature setpoint terminals A+ and A‑ and jumbeforeJP1 on the I/O
using a 0 VDC to 10 VDC input, or a 4 mA to 20 mA board must be installed between pin 1 and 2. To cal-
input connected to CTB1 terminals A- and A+. When- culate the discharge air temperature setpoint for values
ever a reset is called for, the change may be noted by between 4 mA and 20 mA use the following formula:
pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key twice. The
Setpoint = Local Discharge Air Temp Setpoint + °Reset
new value will be displayed as “REM SETP = XXX
°F.” °Reset = (mA signal ‑ 4) x (*Max Reset Value)
16
If a 0 VDC to 10 VDC signal is supplied, it is applied
to terminals A+ and A‑, and jumbeforeJP1 on the I/O Example:
board must be inserted between pins 2 and 3. To cal-
culate the reset discharge air temperature setpoint for Local Discharge Air Temp Setpoint = 45° (7.22°C)
values between 0 VDC and 10 VDC use the following
*Max Reset Value = 10°F (5.56°C)
formula:
Input Signal = 12 mA
Setpoint = Local Discharge Air Temp Setpoint + °Reset
(English)
°Reset = (DC voltage signal) x (*Max Reset Value)
°Reset = 8 mA x 10°F = 5°F Reset
10 16
Example: Setpoint = 45°F + 5°F = 50°F
Local Discharge Air Temp Setpoint = 45°F (7.22°C)
(Metric)
*Max Reset Value = 20°F (11.11°C)
Input Signal = 6 VDC °Reset = 8 mA x 5.56°C = 2.78°C Reset
16
(English)
Setpoint = 7.22°C + 2.78°C = 10.0°C
°Reset = 6 VDC x 20°F = 12°F Reset A 240-24 Volt Ratio Transformer (T3) is
10 used to derive nominal 12 volt output from
New Setpoint = 45°F + 12°F = 57°F the 120 volt supply.

(Metric)
°Reset = 6 VDC x 11.11°C = 6.67°C Reset
10
New Setpoint = 7.22°C + 6.67°C = 13.89°C
*Max Reset Value is the “Max EMS‑PWM Remote Temp. Reset” set-
point value described in the programming section under Cooling
Setpoints. Programmable values are from 2°F to 40°F (1.11°C to
11.11°C).

**Note: The Suction Pressure Setpoints are not remotely

resettable.

146 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting

Clearing history buffers The following is the order of outputs that will appear as
the ENTER/ADV key is pressed:
The history buffers may be cleared by pressing the
HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the UP SYS 1 COMP 1 STATUS TB7-2 IS:
arrow key until you scroll past the last history buffer SYS 1 LLSV STATUS TB7-3 IS:
choice. The following message will be displayed: SYS 1 COMP 2 STATUS TB7-4 IS:
SYS 1 COMP 3 STATUS TB7-5 IS:
I I N I T I A L I Z E H I S T O R Y
SYS 1 HGBP STATUS TB7-7 IS:
E N T E R = Y E S
SYS 2 COMP 1 STATUS TB10-2 IS:
SYS 2 LLSV STATUS TB10-3 IS:
Pressing the ENTER/ADV key at this display will SYS 2 COMP 2 STATUS TB10-4 IS:
cause the history buffers to be cleared. Pressing any SYS 2 COMP 3 STATUS TB10-5 IS:
other key will cancel the operation. SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB7-8 IS:
DO NOT CLEAR BUFFERS. Important SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB7-9 IS:
information may be lost. Contact factory SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB7-10 IS:
service. SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB10-8 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB10-9 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB10-10 IS:
EVAP HEATER STATUS TB8-2 IS:
SYS 1 ALARM STATUS TB8-3 IS:
Service mode SYS 2 ALARM STATUS TB9-2 IS:
EVAP PUMP STATUS TB8-6,7 IS:
Service Mode is a mode that allows the user to enable
SYS 2 HGBV STATUS TB10-7 IS:
or disable all of the outputs (except compressors) on
SPARE DO TB8-4 IS:
the unit, change unit configuration setup parameters
SPARE DO TB8-5 IS:
and view all the inputs to the microboard.
SPARE DO TB8-8, 9 IS:
To enter Service Mode, turn the Unit Switch off and SPARE DO TB9-4 IS:
press the following keys in the following sequence: SYS 1 EEV OUTPUT TB5-1, 2 = XXX%
PROGRAM, UP ARROW, UP ARROW, DOWN AR- SYS 2 EEV OUTPUT TB6-1, 2 = XXX%
ROW, DOWN ARROW, ENTER. SYS 1 COND FAN SPEED J15-1,5 = XXX%
SYS 2 COND FAN SPEED J15-2,6 = XXX%
Service Mode will time out after 30 minutes and return SPARE AO J15-3,7 = XXX%
to normal control mode, if the panel is accidentally left SPARE AO J15-4,8 = XXX%
in this mode. Turning the unit switch on takes the panel DATA LOGGING MODE 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
out of Service Mode.
Each display will also show the output connection on
Service mode – outputs
the microboard for the respective output status shown.
After pressing the key sequence as described, the con- For example:
trol enters Service Mode permitting the outputs (except 9
S Y S 1 L L S V S T A T U S
compressors), operating hours, refrigerant type, expan-
T B 10 - 3 I S O F F
sion valve type, and start/hour counters to be viewed/
modified. The ENTER/ADV key is used to advance
through the outputs. Using the ↑ and ↓ (UP/DOWN ) This display indicates that the system 1 liquid line sole-
arrow keys will turn the respective digital output ON/ noid valve is OFF, and the output connection from the
OFF or modify the value. microboard is coming from Terminal Block 10 – pin 3.
Pressing the ↑ (UP) arrow key energizes the liquid line
solenoid valve (LLSV) and OFF will change to ON in
the display as the LLSV is energized. Energizing and
de-energizing outputs may be useful during trouble-
shooting.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 147

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Service mode – condensing unit Service mode – analog and digital inputs
configuration
After entering Service Mode (PROGRAM ↑↑ ↓↓),
After the Outputs are displayed, the next group of dis- all digital and analog inputs to the microboard can be
plays relate to unit configuration and start/hour coun- viewed by pressing the OBeforeDATA key. After
ters. Data logging, soft start, refrigerant type, pump pressing the OBeforeDATA key, the ↑ (UP) arrow and
control selection, and expansion valve type all must be ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to scroll through the
programmed to match the actual unit configuration. analog and digital inputs.
Soft start (disabled), Refrigerant Type The following is the order of analog and digital inputs
(R410A), and Expansion Valve Type that will appear when sequenced with the ↓ (DOWN)
(Thermostatic), and North American arrow key:
Feature (Enabled) MUST be correctly
programmed or damage to compressors (analog inputs)
and other system components may result. SYS 1 SUCT PRESSURE
UNIT TYPE
The following is a list of unit configuration selections, SYS 1 *DISCH PRESSURE
in order of appearance: SYS 1** SUCTION TEMP.
SYS 2** SUCTION TEMP.
HOT GAS BYPASS TYPE AMBIENT AIR TEMP.
UNIT TYPE (STANDARD OR HEAT PUMP) LEAVING LIQUID TEMP.
COMPRESSOR HOURS RETURN LIQUID TEMP.
COMPRESSOR STARTS SYS 2 SUCTION PRESSURE
DATA LOGGING TIMER X SECS SYS 2 SPARE
FAN CONTROL TYPE (SINGLE) SYS 2 *DISCH PRESSURE
SOFT START (DISABLED) SYS 1 MTR VOLTS
REFRIGERANT TYPE (R410A ONLY) SYS 2 MTR VOLTS
EXPANSION VALVE TYPE (THERMOSTATIC
ONLY) (DIGITAL INPUTS)
PWM TEMP RESET INPUT
REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION =
LOAD LIMIT INPUT
REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME =
FLOW SW / REM START
“NORTH AMERICAN FEATURE SET ENABLED”
SPARE
HYDRO PUMP SELECTION
SINGLE SYSTEM SELECT
EVAP PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS
SYS 1 MP / HPCO INPUT
SYS 1 HOURS
SYS 2 MP / HPCO INPUT
SYS 2 HOURS
* The discharge pressure transducer is optional on some models.
SYS 1 STARTS ** The suction temperature sensor is on EEV units only.
SYS 2 STARTS
The analog inputs will display the input connection,
The last displays shown on the above list are for the the temperature or pressure, and corresponding input
accumulated run and start timers for each system. All voltage such as:
values can also be changed using the ↑ (UP) and ↓
(DOWN) arrow keys, but under normal circumstances S Y S 1 S U C T P R J 7 - 1 0
would not be required or advised. After the last start 2 . 1 V D C = 8 1 P S I G
display, the microboard will display the first program-
mable value under the PROGRAM key.

148 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

This example indicates that the system 1 suction pres- Table 25 - I/O Digital Outputs
sure input is connected to plug 7 – pin 10 (J7-10) on TB7-2 SYS 1 Compressor 1
the I/O board. It indicates that the voltage is 2.1 VDC TB7-3 SYS 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
which corresponds to 81 psig (5.6 barg) suction pres- TB7-4 SYS 1 Compressor 2
sure.
TB7-5 SYS 1 Compressor 3
The digital inputs will display the input connection and TB7-7 SYS 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
ON/OFF status such as: TB10-2 SYS 2 Compressor 1
TB10-3 SYS 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
F L O W S W / R E M S T A R T
TB10-4 SYS 2 Compressor 2
J 13 - 5 I S O N
TB10-5 SYS 2 Compressor 3
TB7-8 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 1
This indicates that the flow switch/remote start input is
TB7-9 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 2
connected to plug 13- pin 5 (J13-5) on the microboard,
and is ON (ON = +30 VDC unregulated input, OFF = TB7-10 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 3
0 VDC input on digital inputs). TB10-8 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 1
TB10-9 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 2
Control inputs/outputs TB10-10 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 3
Table 24 to Table 27 are a quick reference list provid- TB8-2 Evaporator Heater
ing the connection points and a description of the in- TB8-3 SYS 1 Alarm
puts and outputs respectively. All input and output con- TB9-2 SYS 2 Alarm
nections pertain to the connections at the microboard. TB8-6 & 7 Evaporator Pump Starter
TB10-7 SYS 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
Table 24 - I/O Digital Inputs
J13-2 Unit ON/OFF Switch Table 26 - I/O Analog Inputs
J13-3 Load Limit Stage 2 on 3, 5 and 6 Comp. Units J7-10 SYS 1 Suction Transducer
J13-4 Load Limit Stage 1 Unit Type: Chiller = NO JumbeforeJ11-12 to +24
J13-5 SYS 1 Zone Thermostat VDC
J11-12
YCUL Condensing Unit = JumbeforeJ11-12 to +24
J13-6 SYS 2 Zone Thermostat VDC (Do NOT Use)
Single System Select J7-11 SYS 1 Discharge Pressure Transducer (Optional)
J13-7 (Jumbefore= Single Sys, No Jumbefore= Two
J6-9 Ambient Air Temp. Sensor
Sys)
J6-7 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor (Not Used)
CR1
J13-8 J6-8 Discharge Air Temp Sensor
(Sys 1 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
CR2 J9-10 SYS 2 Suction Pressure Transducer
J13-10
(Sys 2 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout) J9-11 SYS 2 Discharge Pressure Transducer
J7-12 Unit/SYS 1 Voltage
J9-12 SYS 2 Voltage

Table 27 - I/O Analog Outputs

9
N/A Not Applicable

JOHNSON CONTROLS 149

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

TB6 TB5 I/O BOARD

J15

TB1

TB7

J3

TB8

J5

IPU
BOARD
TB9
J6

J7

J8
TB10

J9

J10

J14 JP1
J13 J11
J12
LD12721

Figure 43 - Microboard Layout

150 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Checking inputs and outputs Table 28 - Outdoor Air Sensor Temperature/Voltage/

Correlation
Digital inputs VOLTAGE
See the unit wiring diagram. All digital inputs are con- TEMP °F (SIGNAL INPUT TEMP °C
nected to J13-1 of the I/O board. The term “digital” TO RETURN)
refers to two states – either ON or OFF. As an example, 0 0.7 -18
when the flow switch is closed, 30 VDC will be ap- 5 0.8 -15
plied to J13, pin 5 (J13-5) of the I/O board. If the flow 10 0.9 -12
switch is open, 0 VDC will then be present at J13-5. 15 1.0 -9
Pin 1 of J13 is an unregulated 30 VDC source used 20 1.1 -7
to supply the DC voltage to the various user contacts, 25 1.2 -4
unit switch, flow switch, etc. This DC source is factory 30 1.4 -1
wired to CTB1, terminal 13. Any switch or contact used 35 1.5 2
as a digital input would be connected to this terminal, 40 1.7 4
with the other end connecting to its respective digital 45 1.8 7
input on the microboard. Any time a switch or contact
50 2.0 10
is closed, 30 VDC would be applied to that particular
55 2.2 13
digital input. Any time a switch or contact is open, 0
VDC would be applied to that particular digital input. 60 2.3 16
65 2.5 18
Voltages of 24 VDC to 36 VDC can be measured for 70 2.6 21
the DC voltage on the digital inputs. This voltage is in 75 2.8 24
reference to ground. The unit case should be sufficient
80 2.9 27
as a reference point when measuring digital input volt-
85 3.1 29
ages.
90 3.2 32
Analog Inputs – Temperature 95 3.4 35
100 3.5 38
See the unit wiring diagram. Temperature inputs are
connected to the microboard on plug J6. These analog 105 3.6 41
inputs represent varying DC signals corresponding to 110 3.7 43
varying temperatures. All voltages are in reference to 115 3.8 46
the unit case (ground). The following are the connec- 120 3.9 49
tions for the temperature sensing inputs: 125 4.0 52
130 4.1 54
Outside Air Sensor
J6-6 = +5 VDC regulated supply to sensor.
J6-9 = 
VDC input signal to the microboard.
See Table 28 for voltage readings that
correspond to specific outdoor temperatures.
9
J6-3 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC) Return

JOHNSON CONTROLS 151

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 29 - Discharge Air Temp. Sensor Temperature/ Discharge air temperature sensor
Voltage/Resistance Correlation
J6-5 = +5 VDC regulated supply to sensor.
TEMP °F VOLTAGE RESISTANCE TEMP °C
0 1.71 25619 -18 J6-8 = V DC input signal to the microboard.
2 1.78 24046 -17 See Table 29 for voltage readings that
correspond to specific discharge tem-
4 1.85 22580 -16
peratures.
6 1.93 21214 -14
8 2.00 19939 -13 J6-2 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC)
10 2.07 18749 -12
Analog inputs – pressure
12 2.15 17637 -11
14 2.22 16599 -10
See the unit wiring diagram. Pressure inputs are con-
nected to the microboard on plugs J7 and J9. These an-
16 2.30 15629 -9
alog inputs represent varying DC signals correspond-
18 2.37 14721 -8
ing to varying pressures. All voltages are in reference
20 2.45 13872 -7
to the unit case (ground).
22 2.52 13077 -6
24 2.59 12333 -4 System 1 discharge and suction pressures will be con-
26 2.67 11636 -3
nected to J7 of the microboard. System 2 discharge and
suction pressure transducers will be connected to J9 of
28 2.74 10982 -2
the microboard.
30 2.81 10370 -1
32 2.88 9795 0 The discharge transducers are optional on all units. If
34 2.95 9256 1 the discharge transducers are not installed, no connec-
36 3.02 8750 2 tions are made to the microboard and the discharge
38 3.08 8276 3 pressure readout on the display would be zero.
40 3.15 7830 4 The suction pressure transducers are standard on all
42 3.21 7411 6 YCUL’s. The suction pressure transducers have a range
44 3.27 7017 7 of 0 psig to 400 psig. The output will be linear from 0.5
46 3.33 6647 8 VDC to 4.5 VDC over the 400 psig (27.5 barg) range.
48 3.39 6298 9
The discharge transducers have a range from 0 psig to
50 3.45 5970 10 650 psig. The output will be linear from 0.5 VDC to 4.5
52 3.51 5661 11 VDC over the 650 psig (41.25 barg) range. All voltage
54 3.56 5370 12 readings are in reference to ground (unit case).
56 3.61 5096 13
58 3.67 4837 14
60 3.72 4593 16
62 3.76 4363 17
64 3.81 4145 18
66 3.86 3941 19
68 3.90 3747 20
70 3.94 3564 21
72 3.98 3392 22
74 4.02 3228 23
76 4.06 3074 24
78 4.10 2928 26
80 4.13 2790 27

152 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 30 - Pressure Transducers System 2 discharge transducer

0-400 PSIG SUCTION 0-650 PSIG DISCHARGE J9-6 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer.
PRESSURE PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER J9-11 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See the
PRESSURE VOLTAGE PRESSURE VOLTAGE formula above for voltage readings that correspond to
PSIG VDC PSIG VDC specific discharge pressures.
0 0.5 0 0.5
J9-7 = +5 VDC return
50 1.0 81.25 1.0
100 1.5 162.5 1.5 J9-2 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC).
150 2.0 243.75 2.0
The suction transducers have a range from 0 psig to
200 2.5 325 2.5
400 psig (27.5 barg). The output will be linear from 0.5
250 3.0 406.25 3.0
VDC to 4.5 VDC over the 400 psig (27.5 barg) range.
300 3.5 487.5 3.5 The following is a formula that can be used to verify
350 4.0 568.75 4.0 the voltage output of the transducer. All voltage read-
400 4.5 650 4.5 ings are in reference to ground (unit case).
RED WIRE = 5 V, BLACK WIRE = 0 V, WHITE/ V = (Pressure in psig x .02) + .5
GREEN WIRE = SIGNAL
or
TEST POINTS:
Suction Pressure: V = (Pressure in barg x .29) + .5
System 1: ....................................Microboard J7-10 to J7-9 where V = DC voltage input to microboard
System 2: ....................................Microboard J9-10 to J9-9
Discharge Pressure: Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
System 1: ....................................Microboard J7-11 to J7-7
The following are the I/O board connections for the
System 2: ....................................Microboard J9-11 to J9-7
Suction Transducer:

The I/O board connections for the Discharge Transduc- System 1 suction transducer
ers:
J7-5 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer.
System 1 discharge transducer J7-10 = 
VDC input signal to the microboard.
J7-6 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer. See the formula above for voltage readings
that correspond to specific suction pressures.
J7-11 =VDC input signal to the microboard. See the
formula above for voltage readings that corre- J7-9 = +5 VDC return.
spond to specific discharge pressures.
J7-1 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC).
J7-7 = +5 VDC return.
System 2 suction transducer
J7-2 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC).
J9-5 = +5 VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J9-10 = 
VDC input signal to the microboard.
9
See the formula above for voltage readings
that correspond to specific suction pressures.
J7-9 = +5 VDC return.
J7-11 = drain (shield connection = 0 VDC).

JOHNSON CONTROLS 153

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Digital outputs Each output is controlled by the microprocessor by

See the unit wiring diagram and Figure 44. The digital switching 120 VAC to the respective output connection
outputs are located on TB7, TB8, and TB9 and TB-10 energizing contactors, evaporator heater, and solenoids
of the microboard. All outputs are 120 VAC with the according to the operating sequence (see Figure 44).
exception of TB8-6 to TB8-7 which are the contacts 120 VAC is supplied to the I/O board via connections
that can be used for a remote evaporator pump start at TB7-1, TB7-6, TB10-1, TB10-6, TB8-1 and TB9-1.
signal. The voltage applied to either of these terminals Figure 44 illustrates the relay contact architecture on
would be determined by field wiring. the microboard.

SYS 1
TB7-2 COMP 1

TB7-3 LLSV 1
TB7
SYS 1
TB7-4 COMP 2
SYS 1
TB7-5 COMP 3

SYS 1
TB7-7 HGSV
SYS 1
TB7-8 FAN 2
TB7
SYS 1
TB7-9 FAN 1
SYS 1
TB7-10 FAN 3

SYS 2
TB10-2 COMPR 1 (4)

TB10-3 LLSV 2
TB10
SYS 2
TB10-4 COMPR 2 (5)
SYS 2
TB10-5 COMPR 3 (6)

SYS 2
TB10-7 HGSV

TB10-8
TB10
TB10-9 SYS 2
FAN 2
SYS 2
TB10-10 FAN 4

TB8-6 EVAP *
TB8-7 PUMP
TB8
HEAT EXCH *
TB8-2 HEATER

* Not Used
LD12722

Figure 44 - I/O Board Relay Contact Architecture

154 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Optional printer installation

The micro panel is capable of supplying a printout of Parts
unit conditions or fault shutdown information at any The following parts are required:
given time. This allows operator and service personnel
to obtain data and system status with the touch of the 1. WEIGH-TRONIX model 1220 printer.
keypad. In addition to manual print selection, the micro
2. 2.25 in. (5.7 cm) wide desk top calculator paper.
panel will provide an automatic printout whenever a
fault occurs. Detailed explanation of the print function 3. 25 ft. (7.62 m) maximum length of Twisted Pair
is given under “Print Key” located in the Keypad and Shielded Cable (minimum 3 conductor), #18
Display section. AWG stranded, 300 V minimum insulation.
Johnson Controls recommends the field tested WEIGH- 4. One 25-pin Cannon connector and shell.
TRONIX model 1220 printer (or former IMP 24). This Connector: Cannon P/N DB-25P or equivalent.
is a compact low cost printer that is ideal for service Shell: Cannon P/N DB-C2-J9.
work and data logging.
Assembly and wiring
The printer can be obtained by contacting WEIGH- All components should be assembled and wired as
TRONIX at: shown in Figure 45. Strip the outside insulation back
WEIGH-TRONIX several inches and individual wires about 3/8 in.
2320 Airport Blvd. (9.5 mm) to connect the cable at the microboard. Do
Santa Rosa, CA 95402 not connect the shield at the printer-end of the cable.
Phone: 1 -800-982-6622 or 1-707-527-5555
(International Orders Only) Obtaining a printout
A printout is obtained by pressing the PRINT key on
The part number for the printer that is packaged spe- the keypad and then pressing either the OBeforeDATA
cifically for YORK is P/N 950915576. The cable to key or HISTORY key.
connect the printer can either be locally assembled
from the parts listed, or ordered directly from WEIGH-
TRONIX under part number 287-040018.

Chiller Microboard Printer

TB3

TB3-3 TXD 2 RD

TB3-2 CTS 5 CTS

TB3-5 GND 7 SG 9

Shield (connect shield to Pin 5 Do not connect shield

of the connector. at printer end.

LD12723

Figure 45 - Printer to Microboard Electrical Connections

JOHNSON CONTROLS 155

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Troubleshooting
Table 31 - Troubleshooting
PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION
1. No 115 VAC to 24 VAC 1a. Check wiring and fuse 1FU.
Transformer.
1b. C
 heck wiring emergency stop contacts 5 to
L of TB1 Terminal Block.
1c. Replace Control Transformer.
2. No 24 VAC to Microboard. 2. C
 heck wiring Control Transformer to
Microboard.
3. Control Transformer defective, 3. Replace Control Transformer.
no 24 VAC output.
4. Short in wire to temp. sensors or 4. U
 nplug connections at IPU II and I/O Board
NO DISPLAY ON PANEL. UNIT
WILL NOT OPERATE. pressure transducers. to isolate.
5. Defective IPU II and I/O Board or 5. R
 eplace IPU II and I/O Board or the Display
the Display Board. Board.
Contact Johnson Controls
Service before replacing circuit
Boards!

1. No air flow. 1. Check air flow.

2. Air Proving switch incorrectly 2. C
 heck that the Air Proving switch is installed
installed. according to manufacturer’s instructions.
FLOW SWITCH/REM STOP NO
RUN PERMISSIVE 3. Defective Air Proving switch. 3. Replace Air Proving switch.
4. Remote cycling device open. 4. C
 heck cycling devices connected to
terminals 13 and 14 of the CTB1 Terminal
Block.
1. Improbeforesuction pressure 1. Adjust beforerecommended settings.
cutouts adjustments.
2. Low refrigerant charge. 2. Repair leak if necessary and add refrigerant.
3. Fouled filter dryer. 3. Change dryer/core.
LOW SUCTION PRESSURE 4. TXV defective. 4. Replace TXV.
FAULT 5. Reduced air flow 5. Check air flow
6. Defective suction pressure 6. R
 eplace transducer/low pressure switch or
transducer/low pressure switch faulty switch or wiring. See Service section
or wiring. for pressure/voltage formula.
7. LLSV defective 7. Replace LLSV
1. Condenser fans not operating or 1. C
 heck fan motor, and contactors. Ensure fan
operating backwards. blows air upward.
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE 2. Too much refrigerant. 2. Remove refrigerant.
FAULT 3. Air in refrigerant system. 3. Evacuate and recharge system.
4. Defective discharge pressure 4. R
 eplace discharge pressure transducer. See
transducer. Service section for pressure/voltage formula.

156 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 9 – Service and troubleshooting
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Table 31 - Troubleshooting (cont’d)

PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION
1. Compressor internal motor 1. V
 erify refrigerant charge is not low. Verify
protector (MP) open. superheat setting of 10°F to 15°F (5.6°C to
8.3°C). Verify compressor is not overloaded.
MP / HPCO FAULT 2. External overload tripped. 2. Determine cause and reset.
3. HPCO switch open. 3. See High Press. Disch. Fault.
4. Defective HPCO switch. 4. Replace HPCO switch.
5. Defective CR relay. 5. Replace relay.
1. Demand not great enough. 1. N
 o problem. Consult Installation Manual to
aid in understanding compressor operation
and capacity control.
2. Defective water temperature 2. C
 ompare the display with a thermometer.
COMPRESSOR(S) WON’T sensor. Should be within plus or minus 2 degrees.
START
See Service section for RWT/LWT temp./
voltage table.
3. Contactor/Overload failure. 3. Replace defective part.
4. Compressor failure. 4. Diagnose cause of failure and replace.
1. Check DX Coil. 1. C
 ontact the local Johnson Controls service
representative.
2. Improbeforeflow through the DX 2. R
 educe flow to within chiller design specs.
LACK OF COOLING EFFECT Coil. See Limitations in Installation section.
3. Low refrigerant charge. Low 3. C
 heck subcooling and add charge as
suction pressure will be needed.
observed.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 157

 Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

158 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Section 10 – Maintenance

It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to pro- Condenser fan motors

vide maintenance on the system. Condenser fan motors are permanently lubricated and
require no maintenance.
Important
If system failure occurs due to improbeforemainte- Condenser coils
nance during the warranty period, Johnson Controls Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the con-
will not be liable for costs incurred to return the system denser coil surfaces. Cleaning should be as often as
to satisfactory operation. The following is intended necessary to keep coils clean.
only as a guide and covers only the unit components. It
does not cover other related system components which Exercise care when cleaning the coil so
may or may not be furnished by Johnson Controls. that the coil fins are not damaged.
System components should be maintained according to
the individual manufacture’s recommendations as their
operation will affect the operation of the unit.

Compressors Operating parameters

Oil level check Regular checks of the system should be preformed to
The oil level can only be tested when the compressor ensure that operating temperatures and pressures are
is running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there within limitations, and that the operating controls are
is no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell of the com- set within probeforelimits. See the Operation, Start-
pressor. When the compressor is running at stabilized Up, and Installation sections of this manual.
conditions, the oil level must be between 1/4 and 3/4
in the oil sight glass. Note: at shutdown, the oil level Onboard battery back-up
can fall to the bottom limit of the oil sight glass. Use U5 is the Real Time Clock chip located on the 031-
YORK “V” oil when adding oil. 02630 IPU II board that maintains the date/time and
stores customer programmed setpoints. The Real Time
Oil analysis Clock is a 128K bram, P/N 031-02565-000. The IPU
The oil used in these compressors is pale yellow in II board must have JP1 installed when the 128K bram
color (POE oil). If the oil color darkens or exhibits a is installed.
change in color, this may be an indication of contami- Do not confuse JP1 on the IPU II (031-
nants in the refrigerant system. If this occurs, an oil 02630) board with JP1 on the I/O (031-
sample should be taken and analyzed. If contaminants 02550) board.
are present, the system must be cleaned to prevent
compressor failure.
Never use the scroll compressor to pump
the refrigerant system down into a vacuum.
Overall unit inspection
Doing so will cause internal arcing of the
compressor motor which will result in fail- In addition to the checks listed on this page, periodic
ure of compressor. overall inspections of the unit should be accomplished
to ensure probeforeequipment operation. Items such 10
as loose hardware, component operation, refrigerant
leaks, unusual noises, etc. must be investigated and
corrected immediately.

JOHNSON CONTROLS 159

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022

BACnet, Modbus, and YorkTalk 2

Communications
Data can be read and in some cases modified using a See Figure 46 on page 161 for TB1, TB2 and TB3
serial communication BACnet, Modbus or YorkTalk 2 locations.
network connection. This information allows commu-
In most cases, communication parameters will need to
nications of chiller operating parameters and external
be modified. Table 33 on page 162 “Values Required
control changes to setpoint, load limiting, and start/
for BAS Communication” lists setup parameters for the
stop commands.
available protocols. Modification is accomplished by
BACnet and YorkTalk 2 RS485 networks are wired to pressing the PROGRAM, DOWN ARROW, DOWN
the + and - terminals of TB1 for port 1 communica- ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, and
tions. Modbus network connection has the option of ENTER keys in sequence. The list below shows the
RS232 or RS485 connection for port 2 communica- displays for the values that may be modified:
tions. Modbus network is wired to either TB2 or TB3
as follows:
• RS-485: connect to TB2 - Network (-1) to TB2
(-1); Network (+1) to TB2 (+1)
• RS-232: connect to TB3 - Network (RX) to TB3
(TXD); Network (TX) to TB3 (RXD); Network
(GND) to TB3 (GND)

DE MODIFIER ADDRESS P2 PROTOCOL

XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX

DE MODIFIER OFFSET P2 MANUAL MAC

XX ADDRESS XXX

P1 PROTOCOL P2 BAUD RATE

XXXXXX XXXXX

P1 MANUAL MAC P2 PARITY

ADDRESS XXX XXXXX

P1 BAUD RATE P2 STOP BITS

XXXXX X

P1 PARITY P2 HW SELECT BIT

XXXXX XXXXX

P1 STOP BITS REAL TIME ERROR ##

X RESET 1 = YES, 0 = NO 0

Note: See Table 34 for error descriptions

160 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022

035-02550-xxx I/O Board

Figure 46 - Micro Panel Connections

The following table shows the minimum, maximum, and default values.
Table 32 - Minimum, Maximum, and Default Values
DESCRIPTION MINIMUM MAXIMUM DEFAULT
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS -1 41943 -1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET -1 99 -1
P1 BAUD RATE 1200 76800 4800
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, AUTO SELECTABLE
P2 BAUD RATE 1200 57600 1200
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 SELECTABLE
P1, P2 MANUAL Mac
-1 127 -1
ADDRESS
P1, P2 PARITY NONE IGNORE NONE
NONE, EVEN, ODD, IGNORE SELECTABLE
P1 PROTOCOL BACNET API BACNET
BACNET, API SELECTABLE
P2 PROTOCOL TERMINAL MODBUS CLIENT API
TERMINAL, MODBUS IO, MODBUS SERVER, API, MODBUS CLIENT selectable
P1, P2 STOP BITS 1 2 1 10
RESET REAL TIME ERROR NO YES NO

JOHNSON CONTROLS 161

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022

The table below shows set-up requirements for each communication protocol.
Table 33 - Values Required for Bas Communication
PROTOCOL
SETTING DESCRIPTION
BACNET MS/TP MODBUS RTU5 YORKTALK 2
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS 0 to 41943(3) 1 -1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET 0 to 99(4) 0 N/A
P1 PROTOCOL BACNET N/A N/A
P1 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS 0-127(1) N/A N/A
P1 BAUD RATE 9600 to 76800 or Auto Selectable(1) N/A N/A
P1 PARITY NONE N/A N/A
P1 STOP BITS 1 N/A N/A
P2 PROTOCOL N/A MODBUS SVR N/A
P2 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS N/A 0-127(1) N/A
P2 BAUD RATE N/A 19,200(2) N/A
P2 PARITY N/A NONE(2) N/A
P2 STOP BITS N/A 1 N/A
P2 HW SELECT BIT N/A RS-485 or RS-232(1) N/A
RESET REAL TIME ERROR N/A N/A N/A
P1 HW SELECT BIT N/A N/A N/A
CHILLER ID N/A N/A 0

1. As required by network
2. Or other as required by network
3. Number is multiplied by 100, set as required by network
4. Number is added to DE MODIFIER ADDRESS, set as required by network
5. unit operating software version C.MMC.13.03 or later required for Modbus protocol

REBOOT REQUIRED (CYCLE POWER) The table below shows the real time error numbers that
AFTER SETTINGS ARE CHANGED. may be encountered during communication setup and
a description of each.

Table 34 - Real Time Error Numbers

ERROR NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
(##)
0 ALL OK
1 DATUM TYPE OK TEST FAILED
2 ENGLISH TEXT TOO LONG
3 FLOATING POINT EXCEPTION
4 GET PACKET FAILED
5 GET TYPE FAILED
6 INVALID UNIT CONVERSION
7 INVALID HARDWARE SELECTION
8 REAL TIME FAULT
9 SPANISH TEXT TOO LONG
10 THREAD EXITED
11 THREAD FAILED
12 THREAD STALLED
13 IO BOARD RESET
14 BRAM INVALID
15 BACNET SETUP FAILED

162 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022

BACnet and Modbus communications Communications data map notes

Chiller data that can be read and modified using spe- (See Table 35 on page 164)
cific BACnet or Modbus Register Addresses; and the 1. IPU II based units are configured for Native BAC-
data associated with the addresses, is outlined in the net MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications.
following description: Microgateway or E-Link not required for these
two communication protocols.
ANALOG WRITE POINTS
2. BACnet
 Object Types: 0= Analog In, 1 =
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet Analog Out, 2= Analog Value, 3= Bina-
or Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register ry In, 4 = Binary Output, 5= Binary Value,
Address for these points is 1025 + AV #. 8= Device, 15 = Alarm Notification (0 through
BINARY WRITE POINTS 127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects).

This data can be read and modified using a BACnet 3. W

 C= Inches of water column; CFM = Cubic Feet
or Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register beforeMinute; FPM = Feet beforeMinute: PSI =
Address for these points is 1537 + BV #. Lbs beforesquare inch; Pa = Pascals; kPa = Kilo-
pascals; PPM = Part beforeMillion; kJ/kg = Kilo-
ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS joules beforeKilogram.
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus net- 4. Water Cooled Scroll units use the same firmware
work connection and can NOT be modified using this as Air Cooled Scroll units, ignoring Fan Control.
connection. The Modbus Register Address for these
points is 513 + AI #.
BINARY MONITOR ONLY POINTS
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus net-
work connection and can NOT be modified using this
connection. The Modbus Register Address for these
points is 1281 + BI #.
See Table 35 for complete list of BACnet and Modbus
registers.

The latest data map information is listed

on the Johnson Controls Equipment In-
tegration website.

10

JOHNSON CONTROLS 163

 02/11/2020

164
SCROLL CHILLER/HEATPUMP/CONDENSING UNIT Modbus RTU, BACnet MS/TP, N2 Data Map Board: 031-02550
Item Version York P/N Comments
1 C.MMC.13.11, C.MMC.14.11, C.MMC.16.12 031-02755-001, -003, -004 New
2 C.MMC.13.11, C.MMC.14.11, C.MMC.16.13 031-02755-001, -003, -004 Update Unit Control Mode
3 C.MMC.13.23, C.MMC.14.23, C.MMC.16.23 031-02755-001, -003, -004 V14 add op code 19, fault code 31; V18 add R-454B; V21 rem tray heater, mod BD13 and BI10; V23 fc 32 added
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Section 10 – Maintenance

Item BACnet Modbus

Modbus Modbus Data Type Engineering Units Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Ref BACnet Name Object Scaling N2 Metasys
Address Supported
Num Instance (See Note 5) Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ANALOG WRITE POINTS

1 REM_SETP AV1 1026 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 1 °F °C Remote Setpoint [99=Auto] S S S
2 SP_REM_SP_S1 AV2 1027 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 2 PSI BAR Sys 1 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit) O O O
3 LOAD_LIMIT AV3 1028 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 3 None None Load Limit Stage [0,1,2] S S S
4 REM_CR AV4 1029 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 4 °F °C Remote Cooling Range (DAT Unit) O O O
5 SP_REM_SP_S2 AV5 1030 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 5 PSI BAR Sys 2 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit) O O O
6 REM_SP_HEAT AV6 1031 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 6 °F °C Remote Heating Setpoint (HP or YCWL HP) O O O
Remote Heatpump Mode [0=Pnl, 1=Cool, 2=Heat] (HP
7 HP_MODE AV7 1032 03,06,16 Div 10 ADF 7 None None O O O
or YCWL HP)
BINARY WRITE POINTS
8 START_STOP BV1 1538 01,03,05,06,15 N/A BD 1 0/1 0/1 Remote Start/Stop Command [0=Stop, 1=Run] S S S
9 SS_SYS1 BV2 1539 01,03,05,06,15 N/A BD 2 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Remote Start/Stop (SP Unit) N N N
10 SS_SYS2 BV3 1540 01,03,05,06,15 N/A BD 3 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Remote Start/Stop (SP Unit) N N N
Table 35 - BACnet and Modbus Communications Data Map

ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS

11 LCHLT AI1 514 03,04 x10 ADF 8 °F °C Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp S S S
12 RCHLT AI2 515 03,04 x10 ADF 9 °F °C Entering Chilled Liquid Temp S S S
13 DAT AI3 516 03,04 x10 ADF 10 °F °C Discharge Air Temp (DAT Unit) O O O
14 S1_SUCT_TEMP AI4 517 03,04 x10 ADF 11 °F °C Sys 1 Suction Temp (EEV, Cond Units, R-410a/R-454B) O O O
15 OAT AI5 518 03,04 x10 ADF 12 °F °C Ambient Air Temp S S S
16 S1_SUCT_SH AI6 519 03,04 x10 ADF 13 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 1 Suction Superheat (EEV) S S S
17 S1_RUN_TIME AI7 520 03,04 x10 ADF 14 None None Sys 1 Run Time in seconds S S S
18 S1_SUCT_PR AI8 521 03,04 x10 ADF 15 PSI BAR Sys 1 Suction Pressure S S S
19 S1_DSCH_PR AI9 522 03,04 x10 ADF 16 PSI BAR Sys 1 Discharge Pressure S S S
20 S1_CIR_TEMP AI10 523 03,04 x10 ADF 17 °F °C Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c) O O O
21 S1_DEF_TEMP AI11 524 03,04 x10 ADF 18 °F °C Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP) O O O
22 S1_EEV_OUT AI12 525 03,04 x10 ADF 19 % % Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV) O O O
23 S1_AR_TIMER AI13 526 03,04 x10 ADF 20 None None Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer S S S
24 AC_TIMER AI14 527 03,04 x10 ADF 21 None None Anti-Coincident Timer in seconds S S S
25 S2_SUCT_TEMP AI15 528 03,04 x10 ADF 22 °F °C Sys 2 Suction Temp (EEV, Cond Units, R-410a/R-454B) S S S
26 S2_RUN_TIME AI16 529 03,04 x10 ADF 23 None None Sys 2 Run Time in seconds S S S
27 S2_SUCT_PR AI17 530 03,04 x10 ADF 24 PSI BAR Sys 2 Suction Pressure S S S
28 S2_DSCH_PR AI18 531 03,04 x10 ADF 25 PSI BAR Sys 2 Discharge Pressure S S S
29 S2_CIR_TEMP AI19 532 03,04 x10 ADF 26 °F °C Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c) O O O
30 S2_DEF_TEMP AI20 533 03,04 x10 ADF 27 °F °C Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP) O O O
31 S2_SUCT_SH AI21 534 03,04 x10 ADF 28 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 2 Suction Superheat (EEV) S S S
32 S2_AR_TIMER AI22 535 03,04 x10 ADF 29 None None Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer S S S
33 S2_EEV_OUT AI23 536 03,04 x10 ADF 30 % % Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV) O O O
34 NUM_COMPS AI24 537 03,04 x1 ADF 31 None None Number of Compressors S S S

Property of Johnson Controls, Inc.

SCROLL Native Comms Subject to change without notice. 1 of 4

JOHNSON CONTROLS
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Form 150.63-NM9
 02/11/2020

Item BACnet Modbus

Modbus Modbus Data Type Engineering Units Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Ref BACnet Name Object Scaling N2 Metasys
Address Supported
Num Instance (See Note 5) Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
35 S1_OP_CODE AI25 538 03,04 x1 ADF 32 None None Sys 1 Operational Code S S S
36 S1_FLT_CODE AI26 539 03,04 x1 ADF 33 None None Sys 1 Fault Code S S S
37 S2_OP_CODE AI27 540 03,04 x1 ADF 34 None None Sys 2 Operational Code S S S
Form 150.63-NM9

38 S2_FLT_CODE AI28 541 03,04 x1 ADF 35 None None Sys 2 Fault Code S S S
Issue date: 4/30/2022

39 S1_DBG_CODE AI29 542 03,04 x1 ADF 36 None None Sys 1 Debug Code N N N
40 S1_FAN_STAGE AI30 543 03,04 x1 ADF 37 None None Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage S S S

JOHNSON CONTROLS
41 S2_DBG_CODE AI31 544 03,04 x1 ADF 38 None None Sys 2 Debug Code N N N
42 S2_FAN_STAGE AI32 545 03,04 x1 ADF 39 None None Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage S S S
Unit Control Mode [1=LW, 2=RW, 3=DA, 4=SP, 5=HC,
43 CONTROL_MODE AI33 546 03,04 x1 ADF 40 None None S S S
6=HP]
44 AR_TIME AI34 547 03,04 x1 ADF 41 None None Anti-Recycle Time Programmed S S S
45 LCHLT_CUT AI35 548 03,04 x10 ADF 42 °F °C Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout S S S
46 LOW_AMB_CUT AI36 549 03,04 x10 ADF 43 °F °C Low Ambient Temperature Cutout S S S
47 SUCT_P_CO_HT AI37 550 03,04 x10 ADF 44 PSI BAR Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP) O O O
48 L_SUCT_P_CO AI38 551 03,04 x10 ADF 45 PSI BAR Low Suction Pressure Cutout Cooling S S S
49 H_DSCH_P_CO AI39 552 03,04 x10 ADF 46 PSI BAR High Discharge Pressure Cutout S S S
50 COOL_SETP AI40 553 03,04 x10 ADF 47 °F °C Cooling Setpoint S S S
51 SP_SETP_S1 AI41 554 03,04 x10 ADF 48 PSI BAR Sys 1 Cooling Setpoint (SP Unit) O O O
52 CONTROL_RG AI42 555 03,04 x10 ADF 49 °F °C Cooling Range S S S
53 SP_CTL_RG_S1 AI43 556 03,04 x10 ADF 50 PSI BAR Sys 1 Cooling Range (SP Unit) O O O
54 SP_SETP_S2 AI44 557 03,04 x10 ADF 51 PSI BAR Sys 2 Cooling Setpoint (SP Unit) O O O
55 HEAT_SETP AI45 558 03,04 x10 ADF 52 °F °C Heating Setpoint (HP) O O O
56 SP_CTL_RG_S2 AI46 559 03,04 x10 ADF 53 PSI BAR Sys 2 Cooling Range (SP Unit) O O O
57 HEAT_RANGE AI47 560 03,04 x10 ADF 54 °F °C Heating Range (HP) O O O
58 S1_DSCH_TEMP AI48 561 03,04 x10 ADF 55 °F °C Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV) O O O
59 S1_DSCH_SH AI49 562 03,04 x10 ADF 56 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV) O O O
60 S2_DSCH_TEMP AI50 563 03,04 x10 ADF 57 °F °C Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV) O O O
61 S2_DSCH_SH AI51 564 03,04 x10 ADF 58 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV) O O O
62 LEAVING_HOT AI52 565 03,04 x10 ADF 59 °F °C Leaving Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a/R-454B) O O O
63 RETURN_HOT AI53 566 03,04 x10 ADF 60 °F °C Return Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a/R-454B) O O O
64 R_COOL_SETP AI54 567 03,04 x10 ADF 61 °F °C Remote Setpoint S S S
65 R_SP_SETP_S1 AI55 568 03,04 x10 ADF 62 PSI BAR Remote Setpoint 1 (SP Unit) O O O
Table 35 - BACnet and Modbus Communications Data Map (cont’d)

66 R_SP_SETP_S2 AI56 569 03,04 x10 ADF 63 PSI BAR Remote Setpoint 2 (SP Unit) O O O
67 R_HEAT_SETP AI57 570 03,04 x10 ADF 64 °F °C Remote Heating Setpoint (HP) O O O
BINARY READ ONLY POINTS
68 S1_ALARM BI1 1282 01,02,03 N/A BD4 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm] S S S
69 S2_ALARM BI2 1283 01,02,03 N/A BD5 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm] S S S
70 EVAP_HTR BI3 1284 01,02,03 N/A BD6 0/1 0/1 Evaporator Heater Status S S S
71 EVAP_PUMP BI4 1285 01,02,03 N/A BD7 0/1 0/1 Evaporator Pump S S S
72 S1_C1_RUN BI5 1286 01,02,03 N/A BD8 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Comp 1 Run S S S
73 S2_C1_RUN BI6 1287 01,02,03 N/A BD9 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Comp 1 Run S S S
74 S1_LLSV BI7 1288 01,02,03 N/A BD10 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve S S S
75 S1_MODE_SV BI8 1289 01,02,03 N/A BD11 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP) O O O
76 S1_HGBV BI9 1290 01,02,03 N/A BD12 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve O O O
Bivalent Heat Step (YLAE HP)
77 S1_BHS BI10 1291 01,02,03 N/A BD13 0/1 0/1 Compressor Heater (R-410a/R-454B chillers, YCWL O O O
chillers)
78 S1_C2_RUN BI11 1292 01,02,03 N/A BD14 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Comp 2 Run S S S
79 S2_C2_RUN BI12 1293 01,02,03 N/A BD15 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Comp 2 Run S S S
80 S2_LLSV BI13 1294 01,02,03 N/A BD16 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve S S S
81 S2_MODE_SV BI14 1295 01,02,03 N/A BD17 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP) O O O
82 LEAD_SYS BI15 1296 01,02,03 N/A BD18 0/1 0/1 Lead System [0=Sys 1, 1=Sys 2] S S S
83 S1_C3_RUN BI16 1297 01,02,03 N/A BD19 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Comp 3 Run S S S

Property of Johnson Controls, Inc.

SCROLL Native Comms Subject to change without notice. 2 of 4

165
Section 10 – Maintenance

10
 02/11/2020

166
Item BACnet Modbus
Modbus Modbus Data Type Engineering Units Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Ref BACnet Name Object Scaling N2 Metasys
Address Supported
Num Instance (See Note 5) Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
84 S2_C3_RUN BI17 1298 01,02,03 N/A BD20 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Comp 3 Run S S S
85 CH_LIQ_TYPE BI18 1299 01,02,03 N/A BD21 0/1 0/1 Chilled Liquid Type [0=Water, 1=Glycol] S S S
86 AMB_MODE BI19 1300 01,02,03 N/A BD22 0/1 0/1 Ambient Control Mode [0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb] S S S
87 CNTL_MODE BI20 1301 01,02,03 N/A BD23 0/1 0/1 Local Remote Control Mode [0=Manual, 1=Auto] S S S
88 DATA_UNIT BI21 1302 01,02,03 N/A BD24 0/1 0/1 Display Units [0=Imperial, 1=SI] S S S
89 AUTO_LL BI22 1303 01,02,03 N/A BD25 0/1 0/1 Lead Lag Control Mode [0=Manual, 1=Auto] S S S
90 S2_HGBV BI23 1304 01,02,03 N/A BD26 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve O O O

NOTES
Section 10 – Maintenance

1 Units have Native BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU, and N2 communications. No external Gateway is required for these interfaces unless the customer is using Connected Services.
2 BACnet Object Types: 0 = Analog In, 1 = Analog Out, 2 = Analog Value, 3 = Binary In, 4 = Binary Out, 8 = Device, 15 = Alarm Notification (0-127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects)
3 WC = Inches of water Column, CFM = Cubic Feet per Minute, FPM = Feet Per Minute, PSI = Pounds per Square Inch, Pa = Pascals, kPa = kiloPascals, PPM = Parts Per Million, kJ/kg = kiloJoules per kilogram
4 Values that are not applicable due to unit configuration and options will be sent as zero (0).
5 Modbus values are all of type signed. Scaling values in x10 (Bold) indicate scaling in metric is x100. Scaling and signing may not be modified in the field.
6
7
8
9
10

Property of Johnson Controls, Inc.

SCROLL Native Comms Subject to change without notice. 3 of 4
Table 35 - BACnet and Modbus Communications Data Map (cont’d)

JOHNSON CONTROLS
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Form 150.63-NM9
 02/11/2020

Code Value Operational Code Code Value Fault/Inhibit Code

0 No Abnormal Condition 0 No Fault Code
1 Unit Switch OFF 1
Form 150.63-NM9

2 System Switch OFF 2 Low Ambient Temperature

3 Lockout 3
Issue date: 4/30/2022

4 Unit Fault 4 Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature

JOHNSON CONTROLS
5 System Fault 5 High Discharge Pressure
6 Remote Shutdown 6
7 Daily Schedule Shutdown 7 Low Suction Pressure
8 No Run Permissive 8
9 No Cool Load 9
10 Anti-Coincidence Timer Active 10
11 Anti-Recycle Timer Active 11
12 Manual Override 12
13 Suction Limiting 13
14 Discharge Limiting 14
15 15
16 Load Limiting 16
17 Compressor(s) Running 17
18 Heatpump Load Limiting 18 MP/HPCO Fault
19 Pumping Down 19 Low Evaporator Temperature
20 20
21 21
22 22 Unit Motor Current
23 23 Low Superheat
24 24 Sensor Fault
25 25 Discharge Inhibit
26 26 MP/HPCO Inhibit
27 27 Pump Trip
28 28 Pump Fail Make Flow
29 29 High Ambient Temperature
30 30 Anti-Vacuum Low Pressure Cutout
31 31 Flow Switch Open
Table 35 - BACnet and Modbus Communications Data Map (cont’d)

32 32 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor Fault

33 33
34 34
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
39 39
40 40
41 41
42 42
43 43
44 44
45 45
46 46
47 47
48 48
49 49
50 50

Property of Johnson Controls, Inc.

SCROLL Native Comms Subject to change without notice. 4 of 4

167
Section 10 – Maintenance

10
 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YorkTalk 2 Communications Transmitted Data

Received Data (Control Data) After receiving a valid transmission from the Micro-
Gateway or E-Link, the unit will transmit either op-
The unit receives 8 data values from the MicroGate-
erational data or history buffer data depending on the
way or E-Link. The first 4 are analog values and the
History Buffer Request on ENG PAGE 10. Data must
last 4 are digital values. These 8 data values are used as
be transmitted for every page under feature 54. If there
control parameters when in REMOTE mode. When the
is no value to be sent to a particular page, a zero will be
unit is in LOCAL mode, these 8 values are ignored. If
sent. Table 36 YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map
the unit receives no valid YorkTalk 2 transmission for
shows the data values and page listings for this unit.
5 minutes it will revert back to all local control values.
Table 36 YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map lists The latest point map information is listed
the control parameters. These values are found under on the Johnson Controls Equipment In-
feature 54 in the MicroGateway or E-Link. tegration website.

168 JOHNSON CONTROLS

 02/11/2020

SCROLL CHILLER/HEATPUMP/CONDENSING UNIT York Talk 2 (eLink) Board: 031-02550

Item Version York P/N Baud Comments
1 C.MMC.13.05, C.MMC.14.05, C.MMC.16.07 031-02755-001, -003, -004
4800 New
2 C.MMC.13.11, C.MMC.14.11, C.MMC.16.11 031-02755-001, -003, -004
4800 Update: add SCC, section 2
3 C.MMC.16.12 031-02755-004 4800 Update: -004 release
Form 150.63-NM9

4 C.MMC.13.19, C.MMC.14.19, C.MMC.16.19 031-02755-001, -003, -004

4800 Update: V14 add op code 19 and fault code 31; V18 R-454B added as selection Section 2, P56
Issue date: 4/30/2022

5 C.MMC.13.23, C.MMC.14.23, C.MMC.16.23 031-02755-001, -003, -004

4800 Update: V21 Move Bivalent Heat Step from P43 to P80, Tray heater removed; V23 add fault code 32
6

JOHNSON CONTROLS
7
8
9
10

SECTION 1

Eng BACnet Engineering

BACnet Object LON Profile N2 Modbus Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Page Object LON SNVT Type Units
Name Name Metasys
Ref Typ/Ins Address Scale Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
°F °C Remote Setpoint [99=Auto]
P03 AV1 YT2_ S01_ P03 nviYTS01p003 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 1 0001 x10 S S S S S
PSI BAR Sys 1 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit)
Load Limit Stage [0, 1, 2]
P04 AV2 YT2_ S01_ P04 nviYTS01p004 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 2 0002 x1 None None S S S S S
Sys 1 Load Limit Stage [0, 1, 2]
Table 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map

°F °C Remote Heating Setpoint (HP or YCWL HP)

P05 AV3 YT2_ S01_ P05 nviYTS01p005 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 3 0003 x10 °F °C Remote Cooling Range (DAT Unit) O O O O O
PSI BAR Sys 2 Remote Setpoint (SP Unit)
Remote Heatpump Mode [0=Pnl, 1=Cool, 2=Heat]
P06 AV4 YT2_ S01_ P06 nviYTS01p006 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 4 0004 x1 None None (HP or YCWL HP) O O O O O
Sys 2 Load Limit Stage [0, 1, 2]
Start/Stop Command
P07 BV1 YT2_ S01_ P07 nviYTS01p007 SNVT_switch (95) BD 1 0061 N/A 0/1 0/1 S S S S S
Sys 1 Start/Stop Command
P08 BV2 YT2_ S01_ P08 nviYTS01p008 SNVT_switch (95) BD 2 0062 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Start/Stop Command O O O O O
P09 BV3 YT2_ S01_ P09 nviYTS01p009 SNVT_switch (95) BD 3 0063 N N N N N
P10 BV4 YT2_ S01_ P10 nviYTS01p010 SNVT_switch (95) BD 4 0064 N/A 0/1 0/1 History Buffer Request S S S S S
P11 AV5 YT2_ S01_ P11 nvoYTS01p011 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 5 0005 x10 °F °C Leaving Chiller Liquid Temp S S S S S
P12 AV6 YT2_ S01_ P12 nvoYTS01p012 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 6 0006 x10 °F °C Entering Chilled Liquid Temp S S S S S
P13 AV7 YT2_ S01_ P13 nvoYTS01p013 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 7 0007 x10 °F °C Leaving Liquid Temp Hot (YCWL) O O O O O
YT2_ S01_ P14 Discharge Air Temp (Cond Unit)
P14 AV8 nvoYTS01p014 SNVT_count_f (51) °F °C O O O O O
ADF 8 0008 x10 Entering Liquid Temp Hot (YCWL)
P15 AV9 YT2_ S01_ P15 nvoYTS01p015 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 9 0009 x10 °F °C Sys 1 Suction Temperature (EEV) O O O O O
P16 AV10 YT2_ S01_ P16 nvoYTS01p016 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 10 0010 x10 °F °C Ambient Air Temperature S S S S S
P17 AV11 YT2_ S01_ P17 nvoYTS01p017 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 11 0011 x10 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 1 Suction Superheat (EEV) O O O O O
P18 AV12 YT2_ S01_ P18 nvoYTS01p018 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 12 0012 x1 None None Sys 1 Run Time in seconds S S S S S
P19 AV13 YT2_ S01_ P19 nvoYTS01p019 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 13 0013 x10 PSI BAR Sys 1 Suction Pressure S S S S S
P20 AV14 YT2_ S01_ P20 nvoYTS01p020 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 14 0014 x10 PSI BAR Sys 1 Discharge Pressure S S S S S
YT2_ S01_ P21 Sys 1 Suction Temperature (Cond Unit)
P21 AV15 nvoYTS01p021 SNVT_count_f (51) °F °C O O O O O
ADF 15 0015 x10 Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c)
P22 AV16 YT2_ S01_ P22 nvoYTS01p022 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 16 0016 x10 °F °C Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP) O O O O O
P23 AV17 YT2_ S01_ P23 nvoYTS01p023 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 17 0017 x10 % % Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV) O O O O O
P24 AV18 YT2_ S01_ P24 nvoYTS01p024 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 18 0018 x1 None None Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer S S S S S
P25 AV19 YT2_ S01_ P25 nvoYTS01p025 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 19 0019 x1 None None Anti-Coincident Timer in seconds S S S S S
P26 AV20 YT2_ S01_ P26 nvoYTS01p026 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 20 0020 x10 °F °C Sys 2 Suction Temperature (EEV) O O O O O

Johnson Controls, Inc.

Scroll BAS(ISN) Subject to change without notice. 1 of 6

169
Section 10 – Maintenance

10
170

Table 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map (cont’d)

Section 10 – Maintenance
02/11/2020
Eng BACnet Engineering
BACnet Object LON Profile N2 Modbus Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Page Object LON SNVT Type Units
Name Name Metasys
Ref Typ/Ins Address Scale Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P27 AV21 YT2_ S01_ P27 nvoYTS01p027 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 21 0021 x1 None None Sys 2 Run Time in seconds S S S S S
P28 AV22 YT2_ S01_ P28 nvoYTS01p028 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 22 0022 x10 PSI BAR Sys 2 Suction Pressure S S S S S
P29 AV23 YT2_ S01_ P29 nvoYTS01p029 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 23 0023 x10 PSI BAR Sys 2 Discharge Pressure S S S S S
YT2_ S01_ P30 Sys 2 Suction Temperature (Cond Unit)
P30 AV24 nvoYTS01p030 SNVT_count_f (51) °F °C O O O O O
ADF 24 0024 x10 Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c)
P31 AV25 YT2_ S01_ P31 nvoYTS01p031 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 25 0025 x10 °F °C Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP) O O O O O
P32 AV26 YT2_ S01_ P32 nvoYTS01p032 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 26 0026 x10 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 2 Suction Superheat (EEV) O O O O O
P33 AV27 YT2_ S01_ P33 nvoYTS01p033 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 27 0027 x1 None None Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer S S S S S
P34 AV28 YT2_ S01_ P34 nvoYTS01p034 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 28 0028 x10 % % Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV) O O O O O
P35 AV29 YT2_ S01_ P35 nvoYTS01p035 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 29 0029 x1 None None Number of Compressors S S S S S
P36 BV5 YT2_ S01_ P36 nvoYTS01p036 SNVT_switch (95) BD 5 0065 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm] S S S S S
P37 BV6 YT2_ S01_ P37 nvoYTS01p037 SNVT_switch (95) BD 6 0066 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Alarm [0=No Alarm, 1=Alarm] S S S S S
P38 BV7 YT2_ S01_ P38 nvoYTS01p038 SNVT_switch (95) BD 7 0067 N/A 0/1 0/1 Evaporator Heater Status S S S S S
P39 BV8 YT2_ S01_ P39 nvoYTS01p039 SNVT_switch (95) BD 8 0068 N/A 0/1 0/1 Evaporator Pump Status S S S S S
P40 BV9 YT2_ S01_ P40 nvoYTS01p040 SNVT_switch (95) BD 9 0069 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Comp 1 Run S S S S S
P41 BV10 YT2_ S01_ P41 nvoYTS01p041 SNVT_switch (95) BD 10 0070 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Comp 1 Run S S S S S
YT2_ S01_ P42 Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
P42 BV11 nvoYTS01p042 SNVT_switch (95) 0/1 0/1 S S S S S
BD 11 0071 N/A Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP)
P43 BV12 YT2_ S01_ P43 nvoYTS01p043 SNVT_switch (95) BD 12 0072 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve S S S S S
P44 BV13 YT2_ S01_ P44 nvoYTS01p044 SNVT_switch (95) BD 13 0073 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Comp 2 Run S S S S S
P45 BV14 YT2_ S01_ P45 nvoYTS01p045 SNVT_switch (95) BD 14 0074 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Comp 2 Run S S S S S
YT2_ S01_ P46 Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
P46 BV15 nvoYTS01p046 SNVT_switch (95) 0/1 0/1 S S S S S
BD 15 0075 N/A Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP)
P47 BV16 YT2_ S01_ P47 nvoYTS01p047 SNVT_switch (95) BD 16 0076 N/A 0/1 0/1 Lead System [0=Sys1, 1=Sys2] S S S S S
P48 BV17 YT2_ S01_ P48 nvoYTS01p048 SNVT_switch (95) BD 17 0077 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 1 Comp 3 Run S S S S S
P49 BV18 YT2_ S01_ P49 nvoYTS01p049 SNVT_switch (95) BD 18 0078 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Comp 3 Run S S S S S
P50 BV19 YT2_ S01_ P50 nvoYTS01p050 SNVT_switch (95) BD 19 0079 N/A 0/1 0/1 Chilled Liquid Type [0=Water, 1=Glycol] S S S S S
P51 BV20 YT2_ S01_ P51 nvoYTS01p051 SNVT_switch (95) BD 20 0080 N/A 0/1 0/1 Ambient Control Mode [0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb] S S S S S
P52 BV21 YT2_ S01_ P52 nvoYTS01p052 SNVT_switch (95) BD 21 0081 N/A 0/1 0/1 Local/Remote Control Mode [0=Local, 1=Remote] S S S S S
P53 BV22 YT2_ S01_ P53 nvoYTS01p053 SNVT_switch (95) BD 22 0082 N/A 0/1 0/1 Units [0=Imperial, 1=SI] S S S S S
P54 BV23 YT2_ S01_ P54 nvoYTS01p054 SNVT_switch (95) BD 23 0083 N/A 0/1 0/1 Lead/Lag Control Mode [0=Manual, 1=Auto] S S S S S
P55 BV24 YT2_ S01_ P55 nvoYTS01p055 SNVT_switch (95) BD 24 0084 N/A 0/1 0/1 Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve O O O O O
P56 MV1 YT2_ S01_ P56 nvoYTS01p056 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 1 0030 x1 None None Sys 1 Operational Code S S S S S
P57 MV2 YT2_ S01_ P57 nvoYTS01p057 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 2 0031 x1 None None Sys 1 Fault Code S S S S S
P58 MV3 YT2_ S01_ P58 nvoYTS01p058 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 3 0032 x1 None None Sys 2 Operational Code S S S S S
P59 MV4 YT2_ S01_ P59 nvoYTS01p059 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 4 0033 x1 None None Sys 2 Fault Code S S S S S
P60 MV5 YT2_ S01_ P60 nvoYTS01p060 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 5 0034 x1 None None Sys 1 Debug Code N N N N N
P61 MV6 YT2_ S01_ P61 nvoYTS01p061 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 6 0035 x1 None None Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage S S S S S
P62 MV7 YT2_ S01_ P62 nvoYTS01p062 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 7 0036 x1 None None Sys 2 Debug Code N N N N N
P63 MV8 YT2_ S01_ P63 nvoYTS01p063 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 8 0037 x1 None None Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage S S S S S
P64 MV9 YT2_ S01_ P64 nvoYTS01p064 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 9 0038 N N N N N
Unit Control Mode [0=LW, 1=RW, 2=DA, 3=SP,
P65 MV10 YT2_ S01_ P65 nvoYTS01p065 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 10 0039 x1 None None S S S S S
4=CL, 5=HT]
P66 AV30 YT2_ S01_ P66 nvoYTS01p066 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 30 0040 x1 None None Anti-Recycle Time Programmed S S S S S
P67 AV31 YT2_ S01_ P67 nvoYTS01p067 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 31 0041 x10 °F °C Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout S S S S S
P68 AV32 YT2_ S01_ P68 nvoYTS01p068 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 32 0042 x10 °F °C Low Ambient Temp Cutout S S S S S
JOHNSON CONTROLS

P69 AV33 YT2_ S01_ P69 nvoYTS01p069 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 33 0043 x10 PSI BAR Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP) S S S S S

Issue date: 4/30/2022

Form 150.63-NM9
Johnson Controls, Inc.
Scroll BAS(ISN) Subject to change without notice. 2 of 6
 02/11/2020

Eng BACnet Engineering

BACnet Object LON Profile N2 Modbus Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Page Object LON SNVT Type Units
Name Name Metasys
Ref Typ/Ins Address Scale Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P70 AV34 YT2_ S01_ P70 nvoYTS01p070 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 34 0044 x10 PSI BAR Low Suction Pressure Cutout Cooling S S S S S
P71 AV35 YT2_ S01_ P71 nvoYTS01p071 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 35 0045 x10 PSI BAR High Discharge Pressure Cutout S S S S S
Form 150.63-NM9

P72 AV36 YT2_ S01_ P72 nvoYTS01p072 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 36 0046 x10 °F °C Remote Setpoint S S S S S
P73 AV37 YT2_ S01_ P73 nvoYTS01p073 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 37 0047 x10 °F °C Cooling Range S S S S S
Issue date: 4/30/2022

YT2_ S01_ P74 PSI BAR Remote Setpoint 2 (SP)

P74 AV38 nvoYTS01p074 SNVT_count_f (51) O O O O O

JOHNSON CONTROLS
ADF 38 0048 x10 °F °C Remote Heating Setpoint (HP and YCWL HP)
PSI BAR Cooling Range 2 (SP)
P75 AV39 YT2_ S01_ P75 nvoYTS01p075 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 39 0049 x10 O O O O O
°F °C Heating Range (HP and YCWL HP)
P76 AV40 YT2_ S01_ P76 nvoYTS01p076 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 40 0050 x10 °F °C Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV) O O O O O
P77 AV41 YT2_ S01_ P77 nvoYTS01p077 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 41 0051 x10 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV) O O O O O
P78 AV42 YT2_ S01_ P78 nvoYTS01p078 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 42 0052 x10 °F °C Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV) O O O O O
P79 AV43 YT2_ S01_ P79 nvoYTS01p079 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 43 0053 x10 °F (diff) °C (diff) Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV) O O O O O
Bivalent Heat Step (YLAE HP)
P80 BV25 YT2_ S01_ P80 nvoYTS01p080 SNVT_switch (95) BD 25 0085 N/A 0/1 0/1 Compressor Heater (R-410a/R-454B chillers, N N N N O
YCWL chillers)
P81 BV26 YT2_ S01_ P81 nvoYTS01p081 SNVT_switch (95) BD 26 0086 N N N N N
P82 BV27 YT2_ S01_ P82 nvoYTS01p082 SNVT_switch (95) BD 27 0087 N N N N N
P83 BV28 YT2_ S01_ P83 nvoYTS01p083 SNVT_switch (95) BD 28 0088 N N N N N
P84 BV29 YT2_ S01_ P84 nvoYTS01p084 SNVT_switch (95) BD 29 0089 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Available N S S S S
Table 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map (cont’d)

Johnson Controls, Inc.

Scroll BAS(ISN) Subject to change without notice. 3 of 6

171
Section 10 – Maintenance

10
 02/11/2020

172
SECTION 2

Eng BACnet Engineering

BACnet Object LON Profile N2 Modbus Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Page Object LON SNVT Type Units
Name Name Metasys
Ref Typ/Ins Address Scale Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P03 AV101 YT2_ S02_ P03 nviYTS02p003 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 44 0101 N N N N N
P04 AV102 YT2_ S02_ P04 nviYTS02p004 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 45 0102 N N N N N
P05 AV103 YT2_ S02_ P05 nviYTS02p005 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 46 0103 N N N N N
P06 AV104 YT2_ S02_ P06 nviYTS02p006 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 47 0104 N N N N N
P07 AV105 YT2_ S02_ P07 nviYTS02p007 SNVT_switch (95) BD 30 0161 N N N N N
P08 AV106 YT2_ S02_ P08 nviYTS02p008 SNVT_switch (95) BD 31 0162 N N N N N
Section 10 – Maintenance

P09 AV107 YT2_ S02_ P09 nviYTS02p009 SNVT_switch (95) BD 32 0163 N N N N N

P10 AV108 YT2_ S02_ P10 nviYTS02p010 SNVT_switch (95) BD 33 0164 N N N N N
P11 AV109 YT2_ S02_ P11 nvoYTS02p011 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 48 0105 N N N N N
P12 AV110 YT2_ S02_ P12 nvoYTS02p012 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 49 0106 N N N N N
P13 AV111 YT2_ S02_ P13 nvoYTS02p013 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 50 0107 N N N N N
P14 AV112 YT2_ S02_ P14 nvoYTS02p014 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 51 0108 N N N N N
P15 AV113 YT2_ S02_ P15 nvoYTS02p015 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 52 0109 N N N N N
P16 AV114 YT2_ S02_ P16 nvoYTS02p016 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 53 0110 N N N N N
P17 AV115 YT2_ S02_ P17 nvoYTS02p017 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 54 0111 N N N N N
P18 AV116 YT2_ S02_ P18 nvoYTS02p018 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 55 0112 x1 None None Sys 1 Comp 1 Run Hours N S S S S
P19 AV117 YT2_ S02_ P19 nvoYTS02p019 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 56 0113 x1 None None Sys 1 Comp 2 Run Hours N S S S S
P20 AV118 YT2_ S02_ P20 nvoYTS02p020 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 57 0114 x1 None None Sys 1 Comp 3 Run Hours N S S S S
P21 AV119 YT2_ S02_ P21 nvoYTS02p021 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 58 0115 N N N N N
P22 AV120 YT2_ S02_ P22 nvoYTS02p022 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 59 0116 N N N N N
P23 AV121 YT2_ S02_ P23 nvoYTS02p023 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 60 0117 N N N N N
P24 AV122 YT2_ S02_ P24 nvoYTS02p024 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 61 0118 N N N N N
Table 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map (cont’d)

P25 AV123 YT2_ S02_ P25 nvoYTS02p025 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 62 0119 N N N N N
P26 AV124 YT2_ S02_ P26 nvoYTS02p026 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 63 0120 N N N N N
P27 AV125 YT2_ S02_ P27 nvoYTS02p027 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 64 0121 x1 None None Sys 2 Comp 1 Run Hours N S S S S
P28 AV126 YT2_ S02_ P28 nvoYTS02p028 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 65 0122 x1 None None Sys 2 Comp 2 Run Hours N S S S S
P29 AV127 YT2_ S02_ P29 nvoYTS02p029 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 66 0123 x1 None None Sys 2 Comp 3 Run Hours N S S S S
P30 AV128 YT2_ S02_ P30 nvoYTS02p030 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 67 0124 N N N N N
P31 AV129 YT2_ S02_ P31 nvoYTS02p031 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 68 0125 N N N N N
P32 AV130 YT2_ S02_ P32 nvoYTS02p032 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 69 0126 N N N N N
P33 AV131 YT2_ S02_ P33 nvoYTS02p033 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 70 0127 N N N N N
P34 AV132 YT2_ S02_ P34 nvoYTS02p034 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 71 0128 N N N N N
P35 AV133 YT2_ S02_ P35 nvoYTS02p035 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 72 0129 N N N N N
P36 BV105 YT2_ S02_ P36 nvoYTS02p036 SNVT_switch (95) BD 34 0165 N/A 0/1 0/1 Option Indicator [0=Disabled, 1=Enabled] N S S S S
P37 BV106 YT2_ S02_ P37 nvoYTS02p037 SNVT_switch (95) BD 35 0166 N N N N N
P38 BV107 YT2_ S02_ P38 nvoYTS02p038 SNVT_switch (95) BD 36 0167 N N N N N
P39 BV108 YT2_ S02_ P39 nvoYTS02p039 SNVT_switch (95) BD 37 0168 N N N N N
P40 BV109 YT2_ S02_ P40 nvoYTS02p040 SNVT_switch (95) BD 38 0169 N N N N N
P41 BV110 YT2_ S02_ P41 nvoYTS02p041 SNVT_switch (95) BD 39 0170 N N N N N
P42 BV111 YT2_ S02_ P42 nvoYTS02p042 SNVT_switch (95) BD 40 0171 N N N N N
P43 BV112 YT2_ S02_ P43 nvoYTS02p043 SNVT_switch (95) BD 41 0172 N N N N N
P44 BV113 YT2_ S02_ P44 nvoYTS02p044 SNVT_switch (95) BD 42 0173 N N N N N
P45 BV114 YT2_ S02_ P45 nvoYTS02p045 SNVT_switch (95) BD 43 0174 N N N N N
P46 BV115 YT2_ S02_ P46 nvoYTS02p046 SNVT_switch (95) BD 44 0175 N N N N N
P47 BV116 YT2_ S02_ P47 nvoYTS02p047 SNVT_switch (95) BD 45 0176 N/A 0/1 0/1 Expansion Valve Type [0=TXV, 1=EEV] N S S S S

Johnson Controls, Inc.

Scroll BAS(ISN) Subject to change without notice. 4 of 6

JOHNSON CONTROLS
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Form 150.63-NM9
 02/11/2020

Eng BACnet Engineering

BACnet Object LON Profile N2 Modbus Point List Code: S = Standard O = Optional N = Not Available
Page Object LON SNVT Type Units
Name Name Metasys
Ref Typ/Ins Address Scale Imperial SI Point List Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P48 BV117 YT2_ S02_ P48 nvoYTS02p048 SNVT_switch (95) BD 46 0177 N/A 0/1 0/1 YCWL Mode [0=Chiller, 1=Heatpump] N O O O O
P49 BV118 YT2_ S02_ P49 nvoYTS02p049 SNVT_switch (95) BD 47 0178 N N N N N
Form 150.63-NM9

P50 BV119 YT2_ S02_ P50 nvoYTS02p050 SNVT_switch (95) BD 48 0179 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 1 N S S S S
P51 BV120 YT2_ S02_ P51 nvoYTS02p051 SNVT_switch (95) BD 49 0180 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 2 N S S S S
Issue date: 4/30/2022

P52 BV121 YT2_ S02_ P52 nvoYTS02p052 SNVT_switch (95) BD 50 0181 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 3 N S S S S

JOHNSON CONTROLS
P53 BV122 YT2_ S02_ P53 nvoYTS02p053 SNVT_switch (95) BD 51 0182 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 4 N S S S S
P54 BV123 YT2_ S02_ P54 nvoYTS02p054 SNVT_switch (95) BD 52 0183 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 5 N S S S S
P55 BV124 YT2_ S02_ P55 nvoYTS02p055 SNVT_switch (95) BD 53 0184 N/A 0/1 0/1 SCC Auto Detect Digit 6 N S S S S
Refrigerant [0=R-22, 1=R-407c, 2=R-410a, 3=R-
P56 MV101 YT2_ S02_ P56 nvoYTS02p056 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 25 0130 x1 None None N S S S S
454B]
P57 MV102 YT2_ S02_ P57 nvoYTS02p057 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 26 0131 N N N N N
P58 MV103 YT2_ S02_ P58 nvoYTS02p058 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 27 0132 N N N N N
P59 MV104 YT2_ S02_ P59 nvoYTS02p059 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 28 0133 N N N N N
P60 MV105 YT2_ S02_ P60 nvoYTS02p060 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 29 0134 N N N N N
P61 MV106 YT2_ S02_ P61 nvoYTS02p061 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 30 0135 N N N N N
P62 MV107 YT2_ S02_ P62 nvoYTS02p062 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 31 0136 N N N N N
P63 MV108 YT2_ S02_ P63 nvoYTS02p063 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 32 0137 N N N N N
P64 MV109 YT2_ S02_ P64 nvoYTS02p064 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 33 0138 N N N N N
P65 MV110 YT2_ S02_ P65 nvoYTS02p065 SNVT_count_f (51) ADI 34 0139 N N N N N
P66 AV130 YT2_ S02_ P66 nvoYTS02p066 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 73 0140 N N N N N
P67 AV131 YT2_ S02_ P67 nvoYTS02p067 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 74 0141 N N N N N
P68 AV132 YT2_ S02_ P68 nvoYTS02p068 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 75 0142 N N N N N
P69 AV133 YT2_ S02_ P69 nvoYTS02p069 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 76 0143 N N N N N
P70 AV134 YT2_ S02_ P70 nvoYTS02p070 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 77 0144 N N N N N
P71 AV135 YT2_ S02_ P71 nvoYTS02p071 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 78 0145 N N N N N
Table 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map (cont’d)

P72 AV136 YT2_ S02_ P72 nvoYTS02p072 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 79 0146 N N N N N
P73 AV137 YT2_ S02_ P73 nvoYTS02p073 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 80 0147 N N N N N
P74 AV138 YT2_ S02_ P74 nvoYTS02p074 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 81 0148 N N N N N
P75 AV139 YT2_ S02_ P75 nvoYTS02p075 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 82 0149 N N N N N
P76 AV140 YT2_ S02_ P76 nvoYTS02p076 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 83 0150 N N N N N
P77 AV141 YT2_ S02_ P77 nvoYTS02p077 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 84 0151 N N N N N
P78 AV142 YT2_ S02_ P78 nvoYTS02p078 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 85 0152 N N N N N
P79 AV143 YT2_ S02_ P79 nvoYTS02p079 SNVT_count_f (51) ADF 86 0153 N N N N N
P80 BV125 YT2_ S02_ P80 nvoYTS02p080 SNVT_switch (95) BD 54 0185 N N N N N
P81 BV126 YT2_ S02_ P81 nvoYTS02p081 SNVT_switch (95) BD 55 0186 N N N N N
P82 BV127 YT2_ S02_ P82 nvoYTS02p082 SNVT_switch (95) BD 56 0187 N N N N N
P83 BV128 YT2_ S02_ P83 nvoYTS02p083 SNVT_switch (95) BD 57 0188 N N N N N
P84 BV129 YT2_ S02_ P84 nvoYTS02p084 SNVT_switch (95) BD 58 0189 N/A 0/1 0/1 Units [0=Imperial, 1=Metric] N S S S S
NOTES
1 LON SNVTs used: SNVT_count_f (51) and SNVT_switch (95). Must use LON eLink.
Modbus scaling factors indicated in bold with an asterisk (*) are user configurable by a field technician, if necessary. All Modbus values are of the type SIGNED with the exception of the user configurable
2
values that are all UNSIGNED. Modbus function types supported: ENG P03-P06 = Types 03, 06, 16; ENG P07-P10 = 01, 03, 05, 06, 15, 16; ENG P36-P55 & P80-84 = 01, 02, 03
3 BACnet engineering units shown with an Asterisk (*) will be assigned a BACnet engineering unit type of 95 - No Units.
Status codes: Special display characters such as ( ) [ ] { } / \ % < > are not compatible with eLink N2 formats. Substitute text strings "-", PCT, GTN will be used. String lengths are limited to 60 total
4
characters, including spaces.
5
6
7
8
9
10

Johnson Controls, Inc.

Scroll BAS(ISN) Subject to change without notice. 5 of 6

173
Section 10 – Maintenance

10
 02/11/2020

174
Code Code
Operational Code Fault/Inhibit Code
Value Value
0 No Abnormal Condition 0 No Fault Code
1 Unit Switch Off 1
2 System Switch Off 2 Low Ambient Temperature
3 Lockout 3
4 Unit Fault 4 Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
5 System Fault 5 High Discharge Pressure
6 Remote Shutdown 6
7 Daily Schedule Shutdown 7 Low Suction Pressure
8 No Run Permissive 8
Section 10 – Maintenance

9 No Cool Load 9
10 Anti-Coincidence Timer Active 10
11 Anti-Recycle Timer Active 11
12 Manual Override 12
13 Suction Limiting 13
14 Discharge Limiting 14
15 15
16 Load Limiting 16
17 Compressor(s) Running 17
18 Heatpump Load Limiting 18 MP/HPCO Fault
19 Pumping Down 19 Low Evaporator Temperature
20 20
21 21
22 22 Unit Motor Current
23 23 Low Superheat
24 24 Sensor Fault
Table 36 - YorkTalk 2 Communications Data Map (cont’d)

25 25 Discharge Inhibit
26 26 MP/HPCO Inhibit
27 27 Pump Trip
28 28 Pump Fail Make Flow
29 29 High Ambient Temperature
30 30 Anti-Vacuum Low Pressure Cutout
31 31 Flow Switch Open
32 32 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor Fault
33 33
34 34
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 38
39 39
40 40
41 41
42 42
43 43
44 44
45 45
46 46
47 47
48 48
49 49
50 50

Johnson Controls, Inc.

Scroll BAS(ISN) Subject to change without notice. 6 of 6

JOHNSON CONTROLS
Issue date: 4/30/2022
Form 150.63-NM9
Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022 TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART
Temperature Conversion ChartTemperature
- conversion chart
Temperature Conversion Chart -
Actual Temperatures Differential Temperatures
°F = °C °C = °F °F = °C °C = °F
0 -17.8 -18 -0.4 0 0 0 0
4 -15.6 -16 3.2 4 2.2 2 3.6
8 -13.3 -14 6.8 8 4.4 4 7.2
12 -11.1 -12 10.4 12 6.7 6 10.8
16 -8.9 -10 14 16 8.9 8 14.4
20 -6.7 -8 17.6 20 11.1 10 18
24 -4.4 -6 21.2 24 13.3 12 21.6
28 -2.2 -4 24.8 28 15.6 14 25.2
32 0.0 -2 28.4 32 17.8 16 28.8
36 2.2 0 32 36 20 18 32.4
40 4.4 2 35.6 40 22.2 20 36
44 6.7 4 39.2 44 24.4 22 39.6
48 8.9 6 42.8 48 26.7 24 43.2
52 11.1 8 46.4 52 28.9 26 46.8
56 13.3 10 50 56 31.1 28 50.4
60 15.6 12 53.6 60 33.3 30 54
64 17.8 14 57.2
68 20.0 16 60.8
72 22.2 18 64.4 Pressure Conversion Chart -
76 24.4 20 68 Gauge or Differential
80 26.7 22 71.6
84 28.9 24 75.2 PSI = BAR BAR = PSI
88 31.1 26 78.8 20 1.38 1.5 21.8
92 33.3 28 82.4 30 2.07 2 29
96 35.6 30 86 40 2.76 2.5 36.3
100 37.8 32 89.6 50 3.45 3 43.5
104 40.0 34 93.2 60 4.14 3.5 50.8
108 42.2 36 96.8 70 4.83 4 58
112 44.4 38 100.4 80 5.52 4.5 65.3
116 46.7 40 104 90 6.21 5 72.5
120 48.9 42 107.6 100 6.9 5.5 79.8
124 51.1 44 111.2 110 7.59 6 87
128 53.3 46 114.8 120 8.28 6.5 94.3
132 55.6 48 118.4 130 8.97 7 101.5
136 57.8 50 122 140 9.66 7.5 108.8
140 60.0 52 125.6 150 10.34 8 116
144 62.2 54 129.2 160 11.03 8.5 123.3
148 64.4 56 132.8 170 11.72 9 130.5
152 66.7 58 136.4 180 12.41 9.5 137.8
156 68.9 60 140 190 13.1 10 145
160 71.1 62 143.6 200 13.79 10.5 152.3
164 73.3 64 147.2 210 14.48 11 159.5
168 75.6 66 150.8 220 15.17 11.5 166.8
172 77.8 68 154.4 230 15.86 12 174
176 80.0 70 158 240 16.55 12.5 181.3
180 82.2 72 161.6 250 17.24 13 188.5
184 84.4 74 165.2 260 17.93 13.5 195.8
188 86.7 76 168.8 270 18.62 14 203
192 88.9 78 172.4 280 19.31 14.5 210.3
196 91.1 80 176 290 20 15 217.5
200 93.3 82 179.6 300 20.69 15.5 224.8
204 95.6 84 183.2 310 21.38 16 232
208 97.8 86 186.8 320 22.07 16.5 239.3
212
216
100.0
102.2
88
90
190.4
194
330
340
22.76
23.45
17
17.5
246.5
253.8
10
220 104.4 92 197.6 350 24.14 18 261
224 106.7 94 201.2 360 24.83 18.5 268.3
228 108.9 96 204.8 370 25.52 19 275.5
232 111.1 98 208.4 380 26.21 19.5 282.8
236 113.3 100 212 390 26.9 20 290
240 115.6 102 215.6 400 27.59 20.5 297.3
244 117.8 104 219.2

JOHNSON CONTROLS 175

 Form 150.63-NM9
Section 10 – Maintenance
Issue date: 4/30/2022

R410A
Pressure temperature chart
PSIG TEMP ˚F PSIG TEMP ˚F
0 -60 78 20
2 -58 80 21
4 -54 85 24
6 -50 90 26
8 -46 95 29
10 -42 100 32
12 -39 105 34
14 -36 110 36
16 -33 115 39
18 -30 120 41
20 -28 125 43
22 -26 130 45
24 -24 135 47
26 -20 140 49
28 -18 145 51
30 -16 150 53
32 -14 160 57
34 -12 170 60
36 -10 180 64
38 -8 190 67
40 -6 200 70
42 -4 210 73
44 -3 220 76
46 -2 225 78
48 0 235 80
50 1 245 83
52 3 255 85
54 4 265 88
56 6 275 90
58 7 285 92
60 8 295 95
62 10 305 97
64 11 325 101
66 13 355 108
68 14 375 112
70 15 405 118
72 16 500 134
74 17 600 149
76 19 700 159

176 JOHNSON CONTROLS

Form 150.63-NM9
Issue date: 4/30/2022

Notes

JOHNSON CONTROLS 177

5000 Renaissance Drive, New Freedom, Pennsylvania USA 17349 1-800-524-1330 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2022 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 150.63-NM9 (422)
Issue Date: April 30, 2022
Supersedes: 150.63-NM9 (521)